Home

Model 326 User`s Reference - ps-2.kev009.com, an archive of old

1. Figure 3 Boot block jumper location Replacing the battery e o em hea a lt Switch block SW1 Ot Jm bloc l pe sw aE ta T O E Aceh 24 5 BE PE na EA ES gh z GI om E P EN nt l EN ME 7 i J 2 o a T mm a gt Pem Ooooaonorg Qooooooor a o o a Flash boot block gt recovery jumper J16 Miss g o o IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind The lithium battery must be handled correctly to avoid possible danger If you replace the battery you must adhere to the following instructions Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 93 Note In the U S call 1 800 IBM 4333 for information about battery disposal or dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy metal battery or a battery with heavy metal components be aware of the following environmental consideration Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be disposed of with normal domestic waste They will be taken back free of charge by the manufacturer distributor or representative to be recycled or disposed of in a proper manner To order replaceme
2. Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI Gigabit FC2 LVD SE Gigabit SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD Gigabit FC2 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC2 Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI Gigabit FC1 LVD SE Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD Gigabit FC1 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC1 Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 Gigabit FC2 FC1 Gigabit FC1 FC2 PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 Gigabit FC1 FC1 Gigabit FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC2 SCSI ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 SCSI ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 SCSI LVD SE FC1 FC1 SCSI FC1 FC1 LVD SE SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 ServeRAID FC2 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 FC2 ServeRAID FC1 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 Table 46 Four adapter configuration Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PC
3. Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Quad Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE Quad Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI SCSI Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE FC1 LVD SE Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID SCSI ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC2 FC2 LVD SE Quad Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID SCSI HVD ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC2 FC2 Quad PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE Quad PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID SCSI ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE Quad Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID SCSI HVD ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 Quad PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Quad PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 FC1 SCSI Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE Quad Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 SCSI HVD Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 Quad PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI Quad PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Quad PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1
4. cmiTest failed to get CMI capture flag board failure Message Description Probable cause Action DIAG BADINT Err 1030 2030 Port received an interrupt ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest cmiTest when not expecting one DIAG BUS_TIMEOUT ASIC register or ASIC ASIC failure 1 Err 0BoF 4040F SRAM did not respond to portRegTest an ASIC data access sramRetentionTest DIAG CAMSID Err 223C ASIC failed SID NO ASIC failure 1 camTest translation test DIAG CLEAR_ERR Err 0001 Port s diag error flag OK or Informational only None BAD is cleared required DIAG CMBISRF Err 1021 ASIC s central memory ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest SRAMs did not complete the BISR within the time out period DIAG CMBISRTO Err 1020 ASIC s central memory ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest SRAMs did not complete the BISR within the time out period DIAG CMERRPTN Err 102B_ Error detected at the wrong ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest port DIAG CMERRTYPE Err 102A Port got the wrong CMEM ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest error type DIAG CMICKSUM Err 2036 CMI message received ASIC or system 1 cmiTest failed bad checksum test board failure DIAG CMIDATA Err 2035 CMI data received did not ASIC or system 1 cmiTest match data transmitted board failure DIAG CMIINVCAP Err 2034 Unintended ASIC ASIC or system 1 cmiTest erroneously got CMI board failure capture flag DIAG CMINOCAP Err 2033 CMI
5. Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Gigabit SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 SCSI ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE PRO 1000 SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Appendix H Adapter placement tables 201 202 Model 326 User s Reference Glossary of terms and abbreviations Note This glossary of terms and abbreviations is under construction Some entries might not be complete This glossary includes terms and definitions from e The American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems ANSI X3 172 1990 copyright 1990 by the American National Standards Institute ANSI Copies can be purchased from the American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York New York 10018 Definitions are identified by the symbol A after the definition e The ANSI EIA Standard 440A Fiber Optic Terminology copyright 1989 by the Electronics Industries Association ElA Copies can be purchased from the Electronic Industries Associat
6. Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz FC1 FC1 FC2 FC2 Table 44 Two adapter configuration Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA FC2 RSA FC2 RSA FC1 RSA FC1 Quad FC2 Quad FC2 Quad FC1 Quad FC1 Ethernet FC2 Ethernet FC2 Ethernet FC1 Ethernet FC1 SCSI SE FC2 SCSI SE FC2 SCSI SE FC1 SCSI SE FC1 Gigabit FC2 Gigabit FC2 PRO 1000 FC2 PRO 1000 FC2 O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 181 Table 44 Two adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Gigabit FC1 Gigabit FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD FC1 ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID FC1 FC2 FC1 FC1 FC2 FC1 FC1 FC1 FC1 Table 45 Three adapter configuration Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz
7. Power switch does not work and reset button does work Verify that the power on control jumper on J23 extension cable is on pins 1 and 2 Power switch assembly System board Diskette drive in use LED stays on the system bypasses the diskette drive or the diskette drive does not work a Pon If there is a diskette in the drive verify that a The diskette drive is enabled in the Configuration Setup utility program b The diskette is good and not damaged try another diskette if you have one c The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive d The diskette contains the necessary files to start the appliance e The program is OK f The cable is installed correctly correct orientation Run diskette drive diagnostics Cable Diskette Drive System board 90 Model 326 User s Reference Table 9 Engine troubleshooting symptoms and actions continued Error Symptom CRU action Monitor problems general Note Some monitors have their own self tests If you suspect a problem with the monitor refer to the information that comes with the monitor for adjusting and testing instructions Suggested action 1 Monitor 2 Run video diagnostics Note If the diagnostics complete successfully the problem might be a video driver 3 Display adapter system board Fixed disk diagnostic does not recognize drives Test shows fewer drives than are actually installe
8. To add a second IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU you must power off one node and restart the other node It is recommended that you do the following procedure during non peak operation hours 1 Install the RAID storage controller a Attach a keyboard monitor and mouse to the node you will power down first Mount the RAID storage controller into a rack Attach fibre channel cables and power cables d Power down the node see A g g Make sure that you note which node you power down in this step e Power on the unit Wait for all drive lights to become solid green f Restart the node see g On the node that is powered on go into Storage Manager 7 right click the host name and select Rescan h Once the node finds the device it appears under the host name along with the existing unit i Right click the new device and select Manage j Cigale the new array s and logical drive s see a Do not restart the node until all the arrays have finished initializing k After the array s have finished initializing restart the node I The node will install the new devices and then you must start Disk Management m Create the logical partitions format assign drive letters and label CBR s To do this use the procedure described in hage ag n Power down the node and continue with Step bl 2 On the other node a Power on the other node It will find new devices b Restart the system c Upon
9. Track your computers with features such as power management event log and system monitor capabilities e Integrate with Tivoli Enterprise Tivoli NetView Computer Associates Unicenter Microsoft SMS and Intel LANDesk Management Suite In addition you can link to Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage and Terminal Services from UM Services for more information Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage The Model 326 provides a Web based GUI Microsoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage Windows 2000 for NAS Using Windows 2000 for NAS you navigate through administrative task categories by clicking the appropriate tabs and then selecting a task from that category information Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools 11 Terminal Services and the IBM NAS Administration Console If you are familiar with Windows operating systems you can use Terminal Services In some cases you must use Terminal Services to complete administrative tasks You can access Terminal Services in two ways 1 2 Through the UM Services browser as described in step E on page 23 By using the Terminal Services Client software Installing Terminal Services To use the Terminal Services Client complete the following steps to install it on the remote workstation and connect to the Model 326 appliance ls 2 3 Insert the Supplementary CD into the workstation CD ROM drive Select Start gt Run In the Op
10. Check AC power to system Power supply On Off Standby mode or DC problem Check system board cable connectors J32 J33 and J35 Move jumper on J32 s extension cable to pins 2 3 to bypass power control If the DC Good LED comes on press Ctrl Alt Delete Watch the screen for any POST errors Check the System Event Error Log for any listed problems If the system powers up with no errors a Power switch assembly b System board Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power connectors to all internal and external devices Power on the system If the DC Good LED comes on replace the adapters and devices one at a time until you isolate the problem Power supply Power backplane System board On On Power is OK N A Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 87 Light path diagnostics You can use the light path diagnostics built into the Model 326 engine to identify the type of system error that occurred Any LEDs that are illuminated remain illuminated during a shutdown as long as the AC power source is good and the power supplies can supply 5V DC current to the Model 326 engine This feature helps you isolate the Tee if an error causes the Model 326 engine to shut down See Diagnostics panel You can use the light path diagnostics to quickly identify the type of system error that occurred The diagnostics panel is under the wind tunnel Any LEDs that are On remain On when the Mo
11. Error Code Meaning FRU action 405 XXX 00N Failed Ethernet test on 1 Adapter in PCI slot N adapter in PCI slot N 2 System board 415 XXX 000 Failed modem test Suspected part 1 Cable 2 Modem Note Ensure that the modem is present and attached to appliance 3 System board Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 153 154 Model 326 User s Reference Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub This appendix provides setup and diagnostic information for the IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU Note Throughout this section the term switch refers to switches and hubs unless otherwise noted General information The hub is designed for maintenance free operation When there is a suspected failure the hub has self diagnostic capabilities to aid in isolating any equipment or fabric failures The hub supports power on self tests POSTs and diagnostic tests The diagnostic tests determine the status of the hub and isolate problems Telnet commands are used to determine the status of the hub error conditions and hub operating statistics A Telnet session can be established from the IBM StorWatch SAN Fibre Channel Managed Hub Specialist The same Telnet commands can also be issued using the service terminal connected to the serial port Attention Many of the diagnostic tests are disruptive to hub operation Read the information on each diagnostic before beginnin
12. IBM 10 100 PCI Ethernet adapter see FTroubleshooting the 10 100 PCI Ethernel IBM Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter see bcapier on page 100 Alacritech 10 00 Quad Port Ethernet Adapter see FTroubleshooting thel SCSI HVD 3570 adapter see Integrated System Management Processor ISMP see FTesting the Integrated IBM PCI Ultra 160 SCSI Adapter see Troubleshooting the integrated Ethernet adapter This section provides troubleshooting information for problems that might occur with the 10 100 Mbps integrated Ethernet adapter Network connection problems If the Ethernet adapter cannot connect to the network check the following Make sure that the cable is installed correctly The network cable must be securely attached at all connections If the cable is attached but the problem persists try a different cable If you set the Ethernet adapter to operate at 100 Mbps you must use Category 5 cabling If you directly connect two workstations without a hub or if you are not using a hub with X ports use a crossover cable Note To determine whether a hub has an X port check the port label If the label contains an X the hub has an X port Determine if the hub supports auto negotiation If not try configuring the integrated Ethernet adapter manually to match the speed and duplex mode of the hub Check the Ethernet adapter lights on the operator information panel These lights indicate whether a problem e
13. IOPS Input output operations IP See Internet Protocol Glossary of terms and abbreviations 211 IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange IRQ Interrupt request iSCSI A technology that enables the SCSI transport protocol over an IP network by connecting clients initiators and servers to storage SCSI client A device that creates and sends SCSI commands to the target IBM IP Storage appliance iSCSI client logical unit number iLUN A unique number that is assigned to each VLUN The LUN for a single client starts at zero and increments sequentially J jumper A connector between two pins on a network adapter that enables or disables an adapter option feature or parameter value jumper cable Synonym for patch cable K Kerberos Pertaining to the security system of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology s Project Athena It uses symmetric key cryptography to provide security services to users in a network L LAN See local area network local area network A network in which a set of devices are connected to one another for communication and that can be connected to a larger network LAN emulation client LEC A LAN emulation component that represents users of the emulated LAN LAN emulation configuration server LECS ALAN emulation service component that centralizes and disseminates configuration data LAN multicast Sending of a transmission frame that is intended to be accepted by a group of selected da
14. 175 176 176 s 177 181 203 221 Figures File share dependencies Diagnostics panel LEDs Boot block jumper location Battery removal Battery replacement ARON O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 vii viii Model 326 User s Reference Tables OHNATRONS Networking information worksheet for the public connection Summary of configuration and administration tools for the Model 326 Example of local area connection names and network adapter IP addresses Persistent image global settings Persistent image volume settings ISMP compared to the RSA Power supply LEDs ae Descriptions of light path diagnostics LEDs Engine troubleshooting symptoms and actions Power error messages Integrated Ethernet adapter troubleshooting chart 10 100 PCI Ethernet adapter troubleshooting chart Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter troubleshooting chart Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter LED definitions PRO 1000 XT Server adapter troubleshooting chart ServeRAID 4Lx problems and actions 3 SCSI HVD 3570 adapter troubleshooting chart HUB front panel LED status indicators Hub POST tests ese op vg Hub offline and online tests Storage controller troubleshooting Storage unit troubleshooting table Supplementary CD directories IBM Web sites for help services and information POST beep codes POST no beep codes POST error messages Diagnostic error messages Hub POST diagnostic tests Hub
15. Configuring Server for NFS This section describes how to configure Server for NFS Services for UNIX is installed on every IBM NAS machine Additional installation is required only when the NAS is installed into a Windows domain If the NAS is installed as part of a Windows 2000 domain you must install the Server for NFS Authentication module on the domain controllers This module is on the Supplementary CD User and group identification You can enumerate UNIX users and groups by using one of two methods get the data from an NIS server or from local copies of the UNIX passwd and group files If you use an NIS server no special preparation is necessary If local files are used you must copy them to the NAS machine and possibly modify their format for use gt the User Name Mapping function as described in Preparing local copies of passive and group lf you will be using an NIS server I If you are using local files instead of NIS you must ee these files to the NAS and prepare them as follows Obtain copies of the UNIX passwd and group files Copy them into directories on the NAS machine as c winnt system32 drivers etc passwd and c winnt system32 drivers etc group Next delete all special users and groups leaving just the actual users and groups that will be used in accessing files An example of a special user is root usually and UID numbers from 0 to 99 are generally reserved for system accounts and should
16. Diagnostic error message tables Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub O o be Ge a amp 4s 155 155 155 155 155 156 157 157 158 158 158 159 160 165 165 165 165 General information Isolating a system fault Removing power i Service actions for error messages i Setting up partnering with the 3534 Fibre managed hubs Setting IP Address of Fibre Hub and Fibre Switch Running diagnostics on the hub Attaching to the serial port while the hub i is off Attaching to the serial port while the hub is on Running diagnostics from a Telnet session on the Ethernet Diagnostic tests during POST Diagnostic commands Diagnostic command descriptions Error messages Action codes and recommended actions Diagnostic error message formats Error message tables Appendix F Fast UTIL options Configuration settings Host adapter settings Selectable boot settings Restore default settings Raw NVRAM data Advanced adapter settings Extended Firmware Settings Scan Fibre Channel Devices Fibre Disk Utility Loopback Data Test Select Host Adapter Appendix G Customer Replaceable Unit CRU list Appendix H Adapter placement tables Glossary of terms and abbreviations Index Model 326 User s Reference 137 140 145 145 146 146 148 148 155 171 171 171 172 172 172 172 174 175
17. b Replace the controller 001801xx Resource Allocation Error warning message f you install a ServeRAID adapter or a 10 100 Ethernet adapter in an engine as a field upgrade or Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 105 as a field replaceable unit FRU resulting in a combination of PCI adapters that includes three or more 10 100 Ethernet adapters and a ServeRAID adapter the system BIOS might write a power on self test POST 001801xx Resource Allocation Error message to the error log If a monitor is attached to the engine the message will also be displayed on the monitor This message will not cause actual operational problems with the appliance The engine will continue to boot to completion and will otherwise function normally However each time you reboot the engine the same message again will be written to the error log and displayed on the monitor if attached To eliminate these warning messages during POST you can obtain a utility to disable the 10 100 Ethernet adapter s expansion ROM from the NAS support Web site at http www ibm com storage support nas rveRAlD 4Lx problems and actions lists problems and corrective actions associated with the adapter The table helps you determine which adapters might need to be replaced at the conclusion of troubleshooting procedures Note Do not replace any controllers uati ou have followed the POST ISPR error procedures see Replace a ServeRAID controller only when maea to do so in the P
18. replace FRUs of minimal configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated Table 10 Power error messages Message Action Power supply X current share fault level critical excessive current demand on power supply X 1 See EPower problems Power supply X DC good fault level critical power good signal not detected for power supply X 1 Replace power supply X Power supply X temperature fault 1 Replace fan X Power supply X removed 1 No action required information only Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 91 Table 10 Power error messages continued Message Action Power supply X fan fault level critical fan fault in power supply X 1 Replace power supply X Power supply X 12 V fault level critical overcurrent condition detected Power supply X 3 3 V fault level critical 3 3 V power supply X had an error Power supply X 5 V fault level critical 5 V power supply X had an error System over recommended X current level non critical system running too much current on that voltage System running non redundant power level non critical system does not have Add another power supply under nominal value value for X can be 12 12 or 5 System under recommended voltage on 3 3 V level warning 3 3 volt supply under nominal value redundant power 2 Remove option
19. 10 100 PCI Ethernet adapter troubleshooting chart continued Ethernet adapter symptom Suggested Action The LNK LED is not On Check the following 1 Ensure that you loaded the correct network drivers 2 Check all connections at the adapter and the switch 3 Try another port on the switch 4 Ensure that the duplex mode setting on the adapter matches the setting on the switch 5 Ensure that you have the correct type of cable between the adapter and the hub 100BASE TX requires two pairs Some hubs require a crossover cable while others require a straight through cable The ACT LED is not On Check the following 1 Ensure that you loaded the correct network drivers 2 The network might be idle Try accessing a server 3 The adapter is not transmitting or receiving data Try another adapter 4 Ensure that you are using two pair cable for TX wiring Adapter stops working without Check the following apparent cause 1 Run the diagnostics 2 Try reseating the adapter in its slot or try a different slot if necessary 3 The network driver files might be corrupt or missing Remove and then reinstall the drivers The LNK LED is not On you connect the power when Ensure that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Testing the Ethernet adapters with Intel PROSet II Each Model 326 engine comes with Intel PROSet II Use PROSet to view the following Adapter paramete
20. CRU number System part 38P8297 M T 5192 0RU JBOD FINAL ASSEMBLY 09N7285 BLOWER ASSEMBLY 37L0067 RAIL KIT LEFT RIGHT 37L0059 350W POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY 37L0103 ELECTRONIC MODULE ESM LVD LVD 38P7579 FRONT BEZEL 5192 0RU 3710198 BLANK TRAY ASSEMBLY 06P5763 HDD 36 4 GB 06P5764 HDD 73 4 GB 03K9206 GBIC MODULE SW 178 Model 326 Users Reference Table 42 3534 1RU Hub CRU number System part 35L1801 M T 3534 1RU FC HUB FINAL ASSEMBLY 19P0005 RACK SLIDES 34L2767 RACK MOUNT BRACKETS 34L2723 SWITCH SECURING EARS Appendix G Customer Replaceable Unit CRU list 179 180 Model 326 User s Reference Appendix H Adapter placement tables This section contains information on the proper placement of the various adapters The following legend defines abbreviations used in the tables Ethernet IBM 10 100 Ethernet Server adapter Gigabit IBM Gigabit Ethernet SX Server adapter PRO 1000 PRO 1000 XT Server adapter RSA Remote Supervisor Adapter SCSI SE IBM PCI Fast Wide Ultra SCSI adapter SCSI LVD SE IBM PCI Ultra160 SCSI adapter SCSI HVD SCSI HVD 3570 adapter Quad ServeRAID 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter IBM ServeRAID 4Lx Ultra160 SCSI controller FC1 One port IBM FASET Host adapter Fibre Channel FC2 Two port IBM FASET Host adapter Fibre Channel Table 43 One adapter configuration
21. Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 117 IBM 5192 Storage Unit Model ORU storage unit This section contains information to help you solve some of the simpler problems that you might have with the IBM 5192 Storage Unit Model ORU storage unit Use able 22 on page 11d to find solutions to problems that have definite symptoms Refer to your system management software documentation for additional information If you have already run the server test program or if running the test does not reveal the problem have the system serviced 118 Model 326 User s Reference Table 22 Storage unit troubleshooting table Problem Indicator Component Possible Cause Possible Solutions Amber LED on Drive CRU Drive failure Replace failed drive Fan CRU Fan failure Replace failed fan ESM board Subsystem is Check fans for faults Over temperature LED overheated Replace failed fan if necessary Environment too hot Defective LED or hardware failure Check the ambient temperature around the expansion unit Cool as necessary If you cannot detect a fan failure or overheating problem replace the ESM board ESM board Fault LED ESM board failure Replace ESM board Refer to your controller documentation for details ESM board Bypass LED GBIC port empty No corrective action needed if system is properly configured ESM board failure If the ESM board Fault LED is lit replace the ESM board
22. DIAG PORTABSENT Port is not present ASIC or system 1 Err 2670 3070 3870 board failure portLoopbackTest crossPortTest spinSilk DIAG PORTDIED Err 265F Port was in loopback mode ASIC GBIC 2 305F 385F portLoopbackTest crossPortTest spinSilk and then went inactive module embedded optic or fiber cable failure DIAG PORTSTOPPED Err 3874 spinSilk Port is no longer transmitting as indicated by the number of frames transmitted counter being stuck at N frames ASIC GBIC module embedded optic or fiber cable failure DIAG PORTWRONG Err 3078 crossPortTest Frame erroneously received by port M instead of the intended port N ASIC failure DIAG POST_SKIPPED Err POST is skipped Its Informational only None 0004 managed hub message recommended required initialization that POST be executed DIAG REGERR Err 0B15 Data read from ASIC ASIC failure 1 0415 portRegTest register or ASIC SRAM did sramRetentionTest not match data previously written into same location DIAG REGERR_UNRST Port failed to unreset ASIC failure 1 Err 0B16 0416 portRegTest sramRetentionTest DIAG STATS Err 2660 2662 Port counter value did not ASIC GBIC 2 3060 3062 portLoopback match the number of module embedded Test crossPortTest frames actually transmitted optic or fiber cable Possible counters reporting failure e FramesTx number of frames transmitted FramesRx number of frames
23. FC2 Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 Ethernet SCSI Gigabit FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD Gigabit FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet SCSI ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet SCSI ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC2 Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 Ethernet FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet FC1 FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 SCSI SE ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC2 SCSI SE ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE PR
24. Passed Serial Port 1 Test Passed Serial Port 2 Test Passed NVRAM Memory Test Passed Realtime Clock Test Passed Programmable Gate Array Test Passed 12C Interface Test Passed Main Application Checksum Passed Boot Sector Checksum Passed Onboard Ethernet Hardware Test Passed PCI EEPROM Initialization Test Passed 5 When you finish viewing this information press Esc to return to the main option menu Remove the CD then restart the Model 326 engine Testing the Remote Supervisor Adapter 1 Insert the Remote Supervisor Adapter Support CD into the CD ROM drive and restart the engine If the engine does not boot from the CD ROM use POST BIOS setup to configure the CD ROM drive as a boot device 2 After the engine boots the main menu appears containing the following selections Hardware Status and Information e Configuration Settings e Update System Management firmware 3 Use the up and down arrow keys to select Hardware Status and Information and press Enter The Hardware Status and Information menu contains the list of devices with the following diagnostic test results System Management Processor Communication Passed gt Built in Self Test Status Passed Boot Sector Code Revision 16 Build ID CNET15A Main Application Code Revision 16 Build ID TUET15A 4 Use the up and down arrow keys to select the device to view in more detail Press Enter You will see a list of tests and results on the device C
25. or other data recording media 2 A logical disk visible to the appliance over a storage network A member of a single storage network of 1 to n fabrics It can have 1 to n path groups of 1 to n equivalent paths W Windows Internet Name Service WINS Program that provides a distributed database for registering and querying dynamic NetBIOS names to IP address mapping in a routed network environment WINS See Windows Internet Naming Service Windows networking Networking file system protocol for the Windows operating system 218 Model 326 User s Reference X Xmodem A public domain asynchronous data link control DLC protocol that provides packet numbering and checksum error control for the transfer of binary files Glossary of terms and abbreviations 219 220 Model 326 User s Reference Index Numerics 10 100 Ethernet adapters specifying multiple 66 10 100 Mbps integrated Ethernet adapter troubleshooting 96 10 100 PCI Ethernet adapter troubleshooting 98 3534 Fibre Managed Hub POST 112 3534 hub diagnostics 112 3534 managed Fibre hubs setting up partnering 155 5191 RAID Storage Controller managing 29 A adapter teaming enabling 81 adapter troubleshooting and diagnostics 96 adding a second IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU 83 adding more engine memory 84 adding software 51 administering the appliance 9 administration and configuration tools 9 administrative functions advanced 53 77 administra
26. there is a problem with the connector cable switch or hub ACT LNK On Adapter and switch is receiving power and cable connection between them is good ACT LNK Off Check the following Adapter not sending or receiving data e Adapter or switch not receiving power e Cable connection between adapter and switch is faulty Drivers not configured properly ACT LNK Flashing Normal operation LED flashes when the adapter sends or receives data The frequency of the flashes varies with the amount of network traffic 100 On Adapter is operating at 100 Mbps 100 Off Adapter is operating at 10 Mbps Ensure that you are using the correct drivers Ensure that you are using the drivers that come with this adapter Drivers that support previous versions of this adapter do not support this version of the adapter Ensure that the switch port and the adapter have the same duplex setting If you configured the adapter for full duplex ensure that the switch port is also configured for full duplex Setting the wrong duplex mode can degrade performance cause data loss or result in lost connections For 100 Mbps e Use Category 5 cabling and ensure that the network cable is securely attached e Verify the adapter is seated firmly in the slot and connected to a 100BASE TX hub switch not 100BASE T4 Ensure the duplex mode setting on the adapter matches the setting on the switch 98 Model 326 Users Reference Table 12
27. used by the appliance You can also use the IAACU to start Universal Manageability Services UM Services on the appliance enabling you to perform more advanced systems management tasks For networks that are not currently running DHCP servers the IAACU is useful for automatically configuring network settings for newly added appliances such as the Model 326 However networks with DHCP servers will also benefit from using the IAACU because it enables you to reserve and assign the appliance IP address in an orderly automated fashion Even when you use DHCP and do not reserve an IP Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools 13 address for the appliance you can still use the IAACU to discover appliances and to start UM Services Web based systems management Notes le The IAACU configures and reports the TCP IP settings of the first adapter excluding the integrated Ethernet controller that is used for the interconnection of the two engines on each appliance The first adapter is defined by its position if there is an adapter in slot 2 it is the first adapter if there is an adapter in slot 3 it is the first adapter Be sure to connect the first adapter to the same physical network as your systems management console You can do this in one of two ways e Manually configure the network adapter to be on the same subnetwork as the systems management console e Create a any that assigns the network adapter to LE same
28. 2002 29 With this method you can use the Storage Manager client software to manage the storage subsystem directly over the network through each controller s Ethernet connection To manage a controller directly you need A Windows 2000 client computer connected to the local Ethernet network e Storage Manager client software The Storage Manager client software package can be downloaded from the NAS 5195 Model 326 download Web page using the following URL e DHCP server connected to the local Ethernet network e One Ethernet cable for each storage subsystem controller in the 5191 RAID Storage Controller to connect to the local Ethernet network One dual storage subsystem controller 5191 RAID Storage Controller is equivalent to two Ethernet cables two dual storage subsystem controller 5191 RAID Storage Controller Units are equivalent to four Ethernet cables e Ethernet hub or switch To install and configure using the direct managed method 1 Install the SM client software on the Windows 2000 client computer not Node A or Node B 2 Connect each storage subsystem controller in the 5191 RAID Storage Controller to an existing Ethernet network using Ethernet cables A separate stand alone diagnostic network can be created by connecting the SM client computer DHCP computer and all storage subsystem controllers to an Ethernet hub 3 Start Storage Manager The Enterprise Management window appears and a pop up window indicates
29. Check all connections at the adapter and the buffered repeater or switch Use another port on the buffered repeater or switch Ensure that the cable is securely attached Ol RO IO Change the auto negotiation setting on the link partner if possible The link light is on but communications are not correctly established Ensure that the latest drivers are loaded NW Ensure that the adapter and its link partner are set to either auto negotiate or set to the same speed and duplex settings The ACT light is off Ensure that the drivers are loaded Try accessing a server Try another PRO 1000 XT Server adapter Ensure that the cable is securely attached Pow UN 102 Model 326 User s Reference Table 15 PRO 1000 XT Server adapter troubleshooting chart continued PRO 1000 XT Server Suggested action adapter problem Windows 2000 and XP If the machine hangs after configuring the adapters with the PROSet utility perform message Unable to remove the following steps PROSet in SAFE mode 1 Start Windows in Safe mode 2 Access the Device Manager and disable the network adapters and teams 3 Restart the machine 4 Windows should operate normally if the disabled adapters were causing the problem To uninstall PROSet perform the following steps 1 Start Windows in Safe mode 2 Access the Device Manager and disable all teaming instances 3 Restart in Normal mode 4 Using PROSet remove all
30. Controller 1 in Slot 1 Power on self test can take up to 59 Second s test Passed Drive configuration can take up to 6 Minute s 0 Second s test Passed o J If there is a POST Error message the BIOS screen resembles the sample shown below Refer to j and correct the problem The characters XXXX indicate the POST ISPR error Note Your version might be different from the one shown gt IBM ServeRAID BIOS Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2001 All rights reserved BIOS Ver 4 84 01 Controller 1 Slot 3 Logical drive 3 Other 0 Firmware 4 70 17 Status Failed lt lt Press Ctrl I to access the Mini Configuration Program gt gt Initializing ServeRAID Controller 1 in Slot 1 Power on self test can take up to 59 Second s test Failed Controller is not responding properly Run Diagnostics Error Code XXXX YY o 7 The sample BIOS screen below shows configuration status and error information es a IBM ServeRAID BIOS Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2001 All rights reserved BIOS Ver 4 84 01 Controller 1 Slot 3 Logical drive 3 Other 0 Firmware 4 70 17 Status 0K lt lt Press Ctrl I to access the Mini Configuration Program gt gt Initializing ServeRAID Controller 1 in Slot 1 Power on self test can take up to 59 Second s test Passed Drive configuration can take up to 6 Minute s 0 Second s test Failed Controller POST and Config Error Codes ISPR EF10 BCS 09
31. F10 to bypass any options to this effect If the ISPR error is EF10 after disconnecting cables a Confirm that the identified channel s is the cause of the error by verifying that the error presents itself only when the offending channel is reconnected b Check termination of identified channel Check for proper backplane jumper configuration Check for proper cabling configuration in systems that use DASD status cables Reconnect all cables that you disconnected at the beginning of this procedure e Replace SCSI cable f Replace SCSI backplane eo FFFF or other code not listed 1 Isolate between SCSI Subsystem and controller by disconnecting all SCSI cables attached to the suspect card and reboot CAUTION Do not press F5 Doing so changes the configuration If ISPR code is EF10 after disconnecting cables follow the steps below until the error is eliminated a Identify which channel is causing the error by reconnecting cables one at a time and rebooting until the error returns b Disconnect one drive at a time attached to identified channel and reboot each time to determine which drive is causing the problem c Replace SCSI cable attached to the identified channel d Replace backplane attached to the identified channel If the original ISPR code is still present after disconnecting all SCSI cables and rebooting take the following actions until the error is no longer present a Reseat the controller
32. FC1 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 SCSI SE ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC2 Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 ServeRAID SCSI SE ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC1 Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 ServeRAID SCSI SE ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC1 Quad Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE SCSI Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC2 LVD SE Quad Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Quad Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 LVD SE Quad Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI SCSI Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE FC2 LVD SE Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 Quad Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE SCSI Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE Quad Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC1 194 Model 326 User s Reference Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued
33. FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE Ethernet Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE Ethernet Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID RSA SCSI SE Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 FC2 190 Model 326 User s Reference Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 RSA SCSI SE Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID RSA SCSI SE Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Ethernet FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Ethernet Gigabit FC2 FC2 LVD SE RSA Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD FC
34. Faults and problems are displayed with a yellow port indicator The color and blink speed of each port s LED as described in Table 18 indicates the status of each port Table 18 HUB front panel LED status indicators Indicators Status No light showing No light or signal carrier no module no cable for media interface LEDs Steady yellow Receiving light or signal carrier but attached device not yet online Slow yellow Disabled result of diagnostics or portDisable command Blinks every 2 seconds Fast yellow Error fault with the port Blinks every 1 2 second Steady green Online connected with device over cable Slow green Online but segmented loopback cable or incompatible switch Blinks every 2 seconds Fast green Internal loopback diagnostic Blinks every 1 2 second Flickering green Online and frames are flowing through the port Green and yellow The port is bypassed Notes 1 Slow blinks at 2 second intervals 2 Fast blinks at 1 2 second intervals If a GBIC is not installed no light shows on the LED When a GBIC is installed and a cable is connected to a properly functioning Fibre Channel device the LED Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 111 indicator will be steady green If a slow green blink is observed it indicates the port is seeing light but cannot make a proper loop connection This could indicate a possibly defective cable When frame traffic is bein
35. Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit FC2 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Quad SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID RSA SCSI ServeRAID Quad FC2 FC2 LVD SE RSA Quad SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID Quad FC2 RSA Quad SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID RSA SCSI ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Quad SCSI LVD SE FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI Quad FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Quad SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI HVD Quad FC1 FC1 RSA Quad ServeRAID FC2 FC1 RSA ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC2 RSA Quad ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC1 RSA Quad FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA Quad FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet SCSI LVD SE RSA Ethernet Ethernet SCSI FC2 FC2 LVD SE RSA Ethernet Ethernet SCSI LVD SE RSA Ethernet Ethernet SCSI FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC2 FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC1
36. LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE Ethernet SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet Gigabit SCSI LVD SE Ethernet ServeRAID SCSI Gigabit FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE Ethernet SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 Ethernet SCSI Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet SCSI Se
37. Next Add the IP address you created as a resource dependency in Step H and click Next Type the virtual server name NN2 into the Network Name Parameters field and click Finish It takes a few moments to register the virtual server name with your name server After this completes bring the resource online 3 Create the CIFS or NFS file share resource a b 48 Model 326 User s Reference Right click Disk Group 2 and select New gt Resource Enter a file share name for example FS2 and select either File Share or NFS Share Both nodes are possible owners Click Next d Add the resource dependencies for the physical disk and network name that the file share will use and click Next e Enter the share name of FS2 and the path to the disk in this group either drive or subdirectory You can then set e For CIFS shares properties User Limit Permissions Advanced File Share For NFS shares properties Permissions Share A note on anonymous access When you create an NFS share it is strongly recommended that you not disable anonymous access to avoid client connection problems See bage 74 for more details f Click Finish to create the resource g Right click the resource and select Bring online Powering off and powering on the Model 326 The clustering function requires special considerations when you need to power off and power on the Model 326 This section gives the details for those cons
38. No incoming signal detected 1 Reattach the GBIC and Fibre Channel FC cables 2 Replace input and output GBIC or cables as necessary Front panel General machine fault Indicates that a Fault LED somewhere on the expansion unit has been turned on Check for amber LEDs on CRUs GBIC transmit fault 1 Check that the CRUs are plugged in properly If no amber LEDs are lit on the CRUs this indicates a GBIC transmission fault in the expansion unit 2 Have the failed GBIC replaced service technician only Amber LED on and green LED off Power supply CRU Power switch is turned off or AC power failure Turn on all power supply power switches Amber and green LEDs on Power supply CRU Power supply failure Replace failed power supply CRU Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 119 Table 22 Storage unit troubleshooting table continued Problem Indicator Component Possible Cause Possible Solutions All green LEDs off All CRUs Subsystem power 4 Check that all expansion is off unit power cords are plugged in and the power switches are on 2 If applicable check that the main circuit breakers for the rack are turned on AC power failure Check the main circuit breaker and AC outlet Power supply Replace the power supply failure Midplane failure Have the expansion unit serviced Amber LED flashing Drive CRUs Drive rebuild or No correcti
39. Note You must follow these procedures for both nodes Methods for setting up the Model 326 The following sections detail how to set up the Model 326 You must first ensure that the network recognizes the new appliance Which method you should use depends on several conditions In headless mode without a keyboard monitor and mouse directly attached to the unit use one of the following methods IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility If you have multiple appliances or cannot determine the DHCP address install the IAACU to identify appliances and define IP addresses The tool also allows you to set static addresses If you are using this method proceed with Installing the IBM Advanced Windows Terminal Services If DHCP is installed and the IP address requested can be determined use this method for initial setup but you should change the address to static later in the configuration This condition is most appropriate when using Windows Terminal Services for operation of the Model 326 If a are using this method proceed with e The use of a keyboard display and mouse is most appropriate when there is a single or few appliances in the network and you use static setup and definition If er are using this method proceed with Installing the IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility These instructions assume that you have installed and powered on the appliance according to the installation gu
40. Processor register Processor test failed 1 1 3 CMOS write read test 4 Battery failed 2 System board 1 1 4 BIOS EEPROM checksum failed System board 1 2 1 Programmable Interval Timer failed System board 1 2 2 DMA initialization failed System board 1 2 3 DMA page register write read failed System board 1 2 4 RAM refresh 1 DIMM verification failed 2 System board 1 3 1 1st 64K RAM test DIMM failed 1 3 2 1st 64K RAM parity 1 DIMM test failed 2 System board 2 1 1 Secondary DMA register failed 2 1 2 Primary DMA register failed System board System board 2 1 3 Primary interrupt mask register failed System board 2 1 4 Secondary interrupt mask register failed System board information validation failed 2 2 2 Keyboard controller 1 System board failed 2 Keyboard 2 2 3 CMOS power failure 1 Battery and checksum checks failed 2 System board 2 2 4 CMOS configuration 4 Battery 2 System board 2 3 1 Screen initialization failed 1 Jumper on J14 2 System board 2 3 2 Screen memory failed System board 2 3 3 Screen retrace failed System board 2 3 4 Search for video ROM failed System board 2 4 1 Video failed screen believed operable System board Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 137 Table 25 POST beep codes continued
41. RSA Quad FC2 RSA Quad FC2 RSA Quad FC1 RSA Quad FC1 RSA Ethernet FC2 RSA Ethernet FC2 RSA Ethernet FC1 RSA Ethernet FC1 RSA SCSI SE FC2 RSA SCSI SE FC2 RSA SCSI SE FC1 RSA SCSI SE FC1 RSA Gigabit FC2 RSA Gigabit FC2 RSA PRO 1000 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Gigabit FC1 RSA Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI LVD SE FC2 RSA SCSI FC2 LVD SE RSA PRO 1000 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 FC1 RSA SCSI HVD FC2 RSA SCSI HVD FC2 RSA SCSI LVD SE FC1 RSA SCSI FC1 LVD SE RSA SCSI HVD FC1 RSA SCSI HVD FC1 RSA ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID FC1 RSA FC2 FC1 RSA FC1 FC2 RSA FC1 FC1 RSA FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI SE FC2 SCSI SE Quad FC2 Quad SCSI SE FC1 SCSI SE Quad FC1 Quad Gigabit FC2 Quad Gigabit FC2 Quad PRO 1000 FC2 Quad PRO 1000 FC2 Quad Gigabit FC1 Quad Gigabit FC1 182 Model 326 User s Reference Table 45 Three adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Quad PRO 1000 FC1 Quad PRO 1000 FC1 Quad SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI Quad FC2 LVD SE Quad SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD Quad FC2 Quad SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI Quad FC1 LVD SE Quad SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD Quad FC1 Quad ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID Quad FC
42. RX Activity If you cannot link to your switch check the following 1 Check the following LED lights on the adapter TX On The adapter is sending data RX On The adapter is receiving data Link On The adapter is connected to a valid link partner and is receiving link pulses Link Off Link is inoperative a Check all connections at the adapter and link partner b Make sure the link partner is set to 1000 Mbps and full duplex c Ensure the required drivers are loaded PRO Programmable LED Identifies the adapter by blinking Use the Identify Adapter push button in INTEL PROSet II to control blinking 2 Ensure that the cable is installed correctly The network cable must be securely attached at all connections If the cable is attached but the problem persists try a different cable Your computer cannot find Check the following the Gigabit Ethernet SX 1 Verify that the adapter is seated firmly in the slot GODE 2 Try a different Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter Diagnostics pass but the Ensure the network cable is securely attached connection fails Another adapter stopped Check the following working after you installed 1 Verify that the cable is connected to the Gigabit Ethernet SX Adapter and not to the Gigabit Ethernet SX another adapter Adapter 2 Check for a resource conflict 3 Ensure both adapters are seated firmly in the slot 4 Check all cables The adapter stopped working Check
43. Symptom FRU action 3 1 1 Timer tick interrupt failed System board 3 1 2 Interval timer channel 2 failed System board 3 1 3 RAM test failed above address OFFFFH 3 1 4 Time Of Day clock failed ie 2 1 2 DIMM System board Battery System board 3 2 1 Serial port failed System board 3 2 2 Parallel port failed System board 3 2 3 Math coprocessor Processor failed 3 2 4 Failure comparing 1 DIMM CMOS memory size against 2 Battery actual 3 3 1 Memory size DIMM mismatch occurred see the Battery Hardware Installation Guide 3 3 2 Critical SMBUS error occurred Disconnect the server power cord from outlet wait 30 seconds and retry 2 System board 3 DIMMs 4 DASD backplane 5 Power supply 6 Power supply backplane 7 12C cable 3 3 3 No operational 1 Install or reseat the memory modules then do a 3 memory in system boot reset See the Hardware Installation Guide 2 DIMMs 3 Memory board 4 System board Pa sell ee 1 Run diagnostics a ae Sige d 2 Run Configuration Setup Three Short Beeps 1 DIMM 2 System board One Continuous Beep 1 Processor 2 System board Repeating Short Beeps 1 Keyboard 2 System board One Long and One Short 1 Video adapter if present Beep 2 System board 138 Model 326 User s Reference Table 25 POST beep codes continued Symptom FRU action One Lon
44. a replacement part before it fails based on a PFA alert received for a component under warranty Information collected through this Service Agent is available to IBM service support representatives while they are answering or diagnosing problems With early knowledge about potential problems IBM can provide proactive service assisting in maintaining higher availability and performance 58 Model 326 User s Reference The eSA agent must be installed on all IBM NAS appliances that you want to participate in this service You can download the software from the following URL Predictive Failure Analysis Predictive Failure Analysis PFA provides advanced notification of a pending failure so that corrective action can be taken to avoid unplanned downtime The PFA alerts are sent to IBM Director where a wide variety of Event Action Plans can be established such as automatically notifying the administrator through e mail or executing tasks in response to the alert When used in conjunction with the IBM electronic service agent the PFA alerts are routed to an IBM support person who responds to the customer about the alert The alerts can also be forwarded to other management packages For more information For more information on IBM Director consult its user s manual contained on the Documentation CD NAS Backup Assistant The NAS Backup Assistant is a preloaded utility that helps you create and schedule backup batch files and maintai
45. a x Starting Subsystem Management Changing storage subsystem host type Renaming storage subsystems Creating arrays and logical drives Creating arrays and LUNs under the Storage Manager Application Expanding the LUN veg O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 vii Xi Xi Xi Xi xii xii xii xii Formatting the logical drives Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup Networking setup Configuring the interconnect private network adapter Configuring the public local area connection Verifying network connectivity and names resolution Checking or changing the network binding order Joining a node to a domain Cluster setup Configuring clusters Configuring cluster state and properties Setting up cluster resource balancing Setting up failover Creating users Defining UNIX users and groups pa Creating clustered file shares CIFS and NFS Powering off and powering on the Model 326 Recovering from a corrupted Quorum drive Before you add software Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage IBM Director Leke Hoe GE amp Bo Gon amp 2 x Dependencies Hardware requirements Director extensions Naming conventions Web based access Disaster recovery Software distribution Real time diagnostics Rack Manager and inventory enhancements Dynamic NAS groups NAS Web UI task Electronic Service Agent eSA Predictive F
46. alternative to using the Recovery CD Set you can use the restore portion of the disaster recovery solution provided by Persistent Storage Manager PSM to recover the node The restore function allows you to restore the node to the state it was in at the time of the PSM backup in one step You will not have to revert back to the original factory configuration which would require you to subsequentl to determine whether you meet the requirements to use PSM If you have not met the requirements for using the PSM recovery method or if the PSM recovery fails then you must use the Recovery CD Set as described in this chapter Using the Recovery Enablement Diskette and Recovery CD The Recovery CD Set four CDs labeled as Recovery CD 1 Recovery CD 2 Recovery CD 3 and Recovery CD 4 contains the preload image for the Model 326 and is used to recover the preloaded image on either node of the appliance You must start the failed appliance node using the Recovery Enablement Diskette before you can boot Recovery CD 1 Attention The Model 326 does not have a monitor keyboard or mouse attached to it under normal operating conditions Because of this you cannot interact with the preload image restore process using a monitor Starting Recovery CD 1 will without visually prompting the user automatically destroy all data on the system drive Use the Recovery Enablement Diskette and Recovery CD Set only when it is absolute
47. and initializing This process will take place automatically in the background Note You will see notifications that new hardware has been found and you will be asked whether you want to restart your computer Do not restart your computer at this point Finally you will see a message that Windows 2000 has finished installing new devices and you will be asked whether you want to restart you computer Again do not restart your computer at this point Leave this message in the foreground until the array initialization completes 4 Once the initialization for all arrays completes restart the system 5 Continue with Expanding the LUN LUN expansion is enabled by the DiskPart command line utility Using DiskPart you can dynamically expand an existing logical drive into unallocated space that exists in a LUN Note that you cannot use DiskPart to dynamically expand an existing LUN in array You can do this only with array LUN management software such as ServeRAID or Storage Manager Application To expand a LUN use the following two DiskPart commands select This command focuses on selects the volume that you want to expand The format of the command and its options are select volume n 1 You can specify the volume by either index drive letter or mount point path On a basic disk if you select a volume the corresponding partition is put in focus If you do not specify a volume the command displays the current in focu
48. available when this document was developed IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ This section gives troubleshooting information for the IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ engine Note The information in this section must be applied to both engines in the Model 326 As an example when the text reads The engine has light emitting diodes LEDs to help you identify problems this means that each engine in the Model 326 has LEDs which require your attention As another samp the information contained in FEngine troubleshootind applies to each of the two engines Engine diagnostic tools overview The following tools are available to help you identify and resolve hardware related problems Note If you need to remove the engines for inspection do so one at a time remove an engine inspect it and put it back then remove the other engine inspect it and put it back POST beep codes error messages and error logs The power on self test POST generates beep codes and messages to indicate successful test completion or the detection of a problem O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 85 The diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read only memory ROM on the system board These programs are the primary method of testing the major components of the Model 326 engine See Diagno STRETT for more information e Light path diagnostics The engine has light emitting diodes LEDs on its system board to help
49. but occurs at the transport layer to transfer packets between networks group definition A list of directory numbers group definition ID The identifier of a group definition group SAP A single address assigned to a group of service access points SAPs group separator GS character The information separator intended to identify a logical boundary between groups H hard failure An error condition on a network that requires that the network be reconfigured or that the source of the error be removed before the network can resume reliable operation Synonym for hard error hertz Hz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second Note In the United States line frequency is 60 Hz or a change in voltage polarity 120 times per second in Europe line frequency is 50 Hz or a change in voltage polarity 100 times per second 210 Model 326 Users Reference higher level In the hierarchical structure of a data station the conceptual level of control or processing logic above the data link level that determines the performance of data link level functions such as device control buffer allocation and station management host 1 In TCP IP any system that has at least one internet address associated with it A host with multiple network interfaces may have multiple internet addresses associated with it The host can be a a client b a server or c both a client and a server simultaneously 2 In Fibre Channel any system that
50. command to open the GUI interface twgipccf exe 2 Type the new Director System Name and click OK The change takes place immediately Note You might need to delete the NAS appliance from the Group Contents and have it rediscover the appliance by its new name Web based access IBM Director Agent uses an Apache Web Server for Web based access All traffic even logon is certificate based encrypted The Web server requires two ports One port 411 accepts non SSL HTTP requests and automatically redirects to the second port 423 which handles SSL requests 1 Although you can do so it is recommended that you not change the default computer name to avoid the chance of propagating misidentification through the system And if you are using IBM Director to manage your appliance and you change the default name the default name continues to appear in IBM Director Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 55 Disaster recovery It is important to provide adequate backup for key IBM Director Management Server files for restoration purposes It is recommended that you regularly back up the IBM Director Management Server so that you can recover it in the event of a server disaster You need to save customizations that you make to the IBM Director including event action plans schedules thresholds and so on Several commands are provided with IBM Director to accomplish this task twgsave This command saves the compl
51. cycles until toggled by the user The start up time with POST processing is approximately 110 120 seconds for a warm POST and 165 175 seconds for a cold POST The factory default enables POST processing Summarizes the diagnostic results since the hub was last started up including POST results The diagShow command also allows you to loop on the command For example diagShow 4 executes diagShow every 4 seconds continuously until stopped by pressing Enter This may be used to isolate a bad GBIC A port with a changing LLI errs value is prefixed by in the display portLoopbackTest portRegTest ramTest setGbicMode spinSilk Verifies the intended functional operation of the hub by sending frames from each port s transmitter back to the same port s receiver through an internal hardware loopback It tests the hub circuitry up to the serial output of the ASIC Checks each register and static memory located on the system board Registers are set under firmware control and are used to control the hardware route selection and other internal hardware functions The loopback point chosen by this command depends on what kind of GBIC module is present If a GBIC other than an optical SWL or LWL GBIC is present the test loops back only at the input rather than the output of the serial link Copper and unknown GBIC types fall within this category On the hub ports 0 6 are all treated as if a SWL GBIC is present If you do n
52. e Sophisticated discovery of network components e Scheduled asset hardware and software inventories with persistent storage of data e Proactive problem notification and tools for problem resolution e Hardware system component monitors and thresholds to trigger alerts of impending problems e Alert management with automated actions manual intervention or both Process scheduling to automate wide scale client software maintenance clean up temp files restart tasks backups and so on according to any timetable e Help desk and routine maintenance functions such as remote control and file transfer e Extensive security and authentication IBM Director consists of three main components e Management Server Agent Console The Management Server is a centralized systems manager and is the core of the IBM Director product Management data the server engine and the management application logic reside there Install the IBM Director Management Server on a dedicated server that has high availability features When installed on a Windows 2000 server or Windows NT 4 0 server system in the managed environment the Management Server provides the management application logic and persistent data Copyright IBM Corp 2002 53 storage of management information using an SQL database The Management Server maintains a database of all Director Agents and their inventory All alerts from the agents flow to the management server which also
53. files for the operating system or application program Getting customer support and service Purchasing an IBM network attached storage appliance entitles you to standard help and support during the warranty period If you need additional support and services a wide variety of extended services are available for purchase that address almost any need see for information Getting help online www ibm com storage support Be sure to visit the support page that is specific to your hardware complete with FAQs parts information technical hints and tips technical publications and downloadable files if applicable This page is at www ibm com storage support 130 Model 326 User s Reference Getting help by telephone With the original purchase of an IBM hardware product you have access to extensive support coverage During the IBM hardware product warranty period you may call the IBM Support Center 1 800 426 7378 in the U S for hardware product assistance covered under the terms of the IBM hardware warranty Expert technical support representatives are available to assist you with questions you might have on the following e Setting up your network attached storage appliance e Arranging for service e Arranging for overnight shipment of customer replaceable parts In addition if you purchased a network attached storage appliance you are eligible for IBM up and running support for 90 days after installation This service prov
54. in file systems directories or files which are kept on LUNS data bus A bus used to communicate data internally and externally to and from a processing unit storage and peripheral devices A data integrity 1 The condition that exists as long as accidental or intentional destruction alteration or loss of data does not occur T 2 Preservation of data for its intended use DDP See distributed data processing default route A route in the routing table that is used when no other route is specified or appropriate device address 1 In data communication the identification of any device to which data can be sent or from which data can be received 2 The first subchannel address recognized by a channel attached device device identifier ID An 8 bit identifier that uniquely identifies a physical I O device device parity protection A function that protects data stored on a disk unit subsystem from being lost because of the failure of a single disk unit in the disk unit subsystem When a disk unit subsystem has device parity protection and one of the disk units in the subsystem fails the system continues to run The disk unit subsystem reconstructs the data after the disk unit in the subsystem is repaired or replaced See RAID DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Glossary of terms and abbreviations 207 diagnostic diskette A diskette containing diagnostic modules or tests used by computer users and service p
55. intended receiver ASIC ASIC or system 2 centralMemoryTest buffer DIAG CMISA1 Err 2032 An attempt to send a CMI ASIC failure 1 cmiTest message from ASIC to ASIC failed DIAG CMNOBUF Errtt 1029 Port could not get any ASIC failure 1 DIAG DATA Err 266E 306E portLoopbackTest crossPortTest Payload received by port did not match payload transmitted System board GBIC module embedded optic or fiber cable failure 166 Model 326 User s Reference Table 31 Hub diagnostic error messages continued Message Description Probable cause Action DIAG ERRSTAT Err 2640 2647 3040 3047 3840 3847 portLoopbackTest crossPortTest spinSilk Port error statistics counter is non zero meaning an error was detected when receiving frames One of the following status errors occurred e Enc in Encoding error inside frame e CRC_err Cyclic redundancy check on frame failed e TruncFrm Truncated frame e FrmTooLong Frame too long BadEOF Bad end of file Enc out Encoding error outside frame BadOrdSet Bad symbol on fiber optic cable e DiscC3 Discarded class 3 frames ASIC system board GBIC module embedded optic or fiber cable failure 1 DIAG INIT Err 264F 304F 384F portLoopbackTest crossPortTest spinSilk Port failed to go active in the loopback mode requested ASIC system board GBIC module embedded optic or fiber c
56. is licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd Other company product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others 128 Model 326 User s Reference Appendix B Getting help service and information If you need help service technical assistance or just want more information about IBM products you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to assist you IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get information about IBM products and services and find the latest technical information Table 24 lists some of these pages Table 24 IBM Web sites for help services and information www ibm con Main IBM home page ww ibm com storagel IBM Storage home page ww ibm com storage supporl IBM Support home page You might also want to visit the Web pages of other companies for information about other operating systems software and accessories The following are some other Web sites you might find helpful lvww tivoli com lvww cdpi conl Services available and telephone numbers listed are subject to change without notice Service support With the original purchase of an IBM hardware product you have access to extensive support coverage During the IBM hardware product warranty period you may call the IBM Support Center 1 800 426 7378 in the U S for hardware product assistance covered under the terms of the IBM hardware warranty The following servic
57. is sufficient Use a 4 GB partition for the operating system including the swap file All IBM NAS products exceed the minimum hardware requirements for operating an IBM Director Agent Director extensions A portfolio of advanced management tools for IBM specific hardware is provided by IBM Director as a set of optional enhancements These tools integrate into IBM Director and provide management capabilities from a single console with a consistent look and feel These extensions are provided as part of the preinstalled IBM Director Agent on the IBM NAS appliances e Management Processor Assistant Capacity Manager e Cluster Systems Management Rack Manager e ServeRAID Manager e Software Rejuvenation e Systems Availability To use these extensions you must load them on the IBM Director Management Server during installation Naming conventions All IBM Director Agents have a Director system name that it is known by the Management Server and Consoles This Director System Name is defaulted to the computer name during the NAS appliance preinstallation process The Director system name does not have to be the same as the computer name The Director system name is displayed on the IBM Director Console to identify the NAS Appliance under the Group Contents column You can optionally change the Director System Name on an agent using the following procedure 1 Open a command prompt window and enter the following IBM Director Agent
58. is not recommended as the adapter was configured specifically for the Model 326 The board can be configured using Fast UTIL Access Fast UTIL by pressing Alt Q during the adapter BIOS initialization it may take a few seconds for the Fast UTIL menu to appear If you have more than one FAStT Host Adapter Fast UTIL prompts you to select the adapter you want to configure After changing the settings Fast UTIL restarts your system to load the new parameters Attention If the configuration settings are incorrect your FASET Host Adapter board might not function properly Configuration settings This is the first selection on the Fast UTIL Options menu These settings configure the Fibre Channel FC devices and the FASET Host Adapter to which they are attached Host adapter settings From the Configuration Settings menu in Fast UTIL select Host aes te Settings The default settings for the FAStT Host Adapter are listed in and described in the following paragraphs Table 33 Host adapter settings Setting Options Default Host Adapter BIOS Enabled or Disabled Disabled Frame Size 512 1024 2048 2048 Loop Reset Delay 0 15 seconds 5 seconds Adapter Hard Loop ID Enabled or Disabled Disabled Hard Loop ID 0 125 125 Host Adapter BIOS When this setting is disabled the ROM BIOS on the FAST Host Adapter is disabled freeing space in upper memory This setting must be enabled if you are booting from an FC di
59. itself into a desired state by means of its own action for example a machine routine whose first few instructions are sufficient to bring the rest of itself into the computer from an input device A bps See bits per second Glossary of terms and abbreviations 205 broadcast frame A frame that is simultaneously transmitted to more than one destination A broadcast frame is forwarded by all bridges unless otherwise restricted broadcast topology A network topology in which all attaching devices are capable of receiving a signal transmitted by any other attaching device on the network buffer storage 1 A special purpose storage or storage area allowing through temporary storage the data transfer between two functional units having different transfer characteristics A buffer storage is used between non synchronized devices or where one is serial and the other is parallel or between those having different transfer rates Synonymous with buffer T 2 In word processing a temporary storage in which text is held for processing or communication T building cable The permanently installed cable within a building that interconnects offices to wiring closets wiring closets to wiring closets and wiring closets to computer rooms of building entrances building entrance The entry point in a building where external communication cables are interconnected with internal building cables C cache A high speed buffer storage that cont
60. of Drive_x where x is the letter of this volume DOQoTpy Note For the Quorum drive label the volume Quorum Disk f Click Next Do not enable disk compression Select Finish Format all other drives but do not enable compression Use all space available for each drive for each logical drive assigned by the operating system Customizing the factory configuration 1 Q After rebooting open IBM NAS Admin and select Disk Management Local in the Storage folder The Write Signature and Upgrade Disk Wizard opens Click Cancel Right click Disk 1 and select Write Signature Write Signature to all disks that will be accessed by the Cluster Server all disks in view On the Quorum drive a Right click and select Create Partition and click Next Chapter 4 Setting up storage 35 Select Primary Partition and click Next Select the entire disk size and click Next Select Drive Letter as G Enter the following properties e File System of NTFS e Volume Label of Quorum Disk f Click Next 9205 Do not enable disk compression and select Finish 6 Format all other drives but do not enable compression Use all space available for each drive for each logical drive assigned by the operating system Assign drive letter H for the second drive the first user data volume and so on 36 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup Note Before proceeding wi
61. of a specific NIS server in the NIS server field 4 Click Show Windows Users to display all of the Windows user names in the Windows domain you selected 5 Click Show UNIX Users to display all of the UNIX user names in the NIS domain you selected 6 Enter a Windows user name or select one from the list of Windows user names 7 Enter a UNIX user name to be mapped to the Windows user name you specified or select one from the list of UNIX user names 8 Click Add to add the mapping between the UNIX user name and Windows user name to the list of maps 9 If multiple Windows user names are mapped to one UNIX user name select one Windows user name to be the primary user name Select the mapping corresponding to the primary user name from the list of maps and then click Set Primary b Define group mappings as follows 1 Click Show group maps 2 Select the Windows domain name the domain to which you joined the Model 326 earlier in this chapter from the drop down list 3 In the NIS domain field enter the NIS domain name You can also enter the name of a specific NIS server in the NIS server field 4 Click Show Windows Groups to display all of the Windows group names in the Windows domain you selected 5 Click Show UNIX Groups to display all of the UNIX group names in the NIS domain you selected 6 Enter a Windows group name or select one from the list of Windows group names 7 Enter a UNIX group name to be mapped to the Win
62. on local drives or drives on the external storage that are logically local On various panels such as the New Persistent Image Schedule panel the Keep the last field indicates the number of persistent images The total number of persistent images that you enter in these fields does not override the maximum number of persistent images that you set in the Global Settings panel For example if the maximum number of persistent images is 10 and you enter numbers in other fields that add up to greater than 10 only 10 persistent images will be taken You cannot take a persistent image of the maintenance drive D Hence you will not see it as a choice in either the New Persistent Image Schedule panel or the Create Persistent Image panel Do not take a persistent image of the clustering Quorum disk See 2 pted Quorum d for information on how to recover from a corrupted Quorum drive e PSM stores the cache file for each drive on the drive itself The first persistent image created on a particular drive will require a significant amount of time because the PSM cache file must be created pre allocated for that drive The time required for creation depends on the configured size of the cache file 15 percent of the total drive size by default Creation takes roughly three to four minutes per gigabyte For example a 10 GB cache file would require 30 to 40 minutes to create You should create a persistent image for a drive before scheduling a
63. one for each path group Copper Distributed Data Interface CDDI A proposed ANSI standard that defines a dual counter rotating ring which operates at a rate of 100 Mbps over Category 5 copper wire coprocessor A secondary processor used to speed up operations by handling some of the workload of the main CPU CRC See cyclic redundancy check CRU See customer replaceable unit customer replaceable unit CRU An assembly or part that a customer can replace in its entirety when any of its components fail Contrast with field replaceable unit FRU cyclic redundancy check CRC 1 A redundancy check in which the check key is generated by a cyclic algorithm T 2 A system of error checking performed at both the sending and receiving station after a block check character has been accumulated D daemon A program that runs unattended to perform a standard service Some daemons are triggered automatically to perform their task others operate periodically data port Ethernet ports used for storage traffic and configuration purposes DASD queue A queue that resides on a direct access storage device DASD data store An abstraction for a repository where data is kept independent of underlying implementation Data stores can be block based a LUN or set of LUNs file based a local or remote file system or relational a database Since IBM TotalStorage NAS family appliances are file based all of their datastores must be kept
64. only memory ROM on the system board These programs are the primary method of testing the major components of your appliance Diagnostic program error messages indicate that a problem exists they are not intended to be used to identify a failing part Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems that are indicated by error messages should be performed by trained service personnel For a list of error messages and associated actions that you can take see Sometimes the first error to occur causes additional errors In this case the appliance displays more than one error message Always follow the suggested action instructions for the first error message that appears Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 145 The following sections contain the error codes that might appear in the detailed test log and summary log when running the diagnostic programs The error code format is as follows fff ttt iii date cc text message where fff The three digit function code that indicates the function being tested when the error occurred for example function code 089 is for the microprocessor ttt The three digit failure code that indicates the exact test failure encountered iii The three digit device ID date The date the diagnostic test was run and the error recorded cc The check digit used to verify the validity of the information text message The diagnostic message that indicates the reason for the problem
65. only once a day The set of properties you define are the same properties described in the Persistent Images panel description assigned above when you define these properties all persistent images created according to this schedule entry will be given those properties Once a scheduled persistent image is created certain properties of that persistent image can be modified through the Persistent Images panel independently of other persistent images created according to the schedule After you create a schedule entry it appears in the list of scheduled persistent images Subsequently you can modify the properties of an existing entry such as Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 63 start time repetition rate the volume s and so on For a schedule you can name the persistent images based on a pattern you configure The following format specifiers allow you to customize variable portions of the name M 3 letter month D Day Y Year h Hour in 12 hour format S Second i Instance a AM PM H Hour in 24 hour format W Day of week M T W W 3 letter day of week Mon Tue Wed Percent sign As an example the name pattern w M D Y h m a would produce the persistent image name Mon Apr 1 2002 10 47 AM Restore Persistent Images On this panel you can select an existing persistent image and quickly restore the volume contained in the image back to the state it was in at the time
66. or switch is on 2 Replace attached devices that have failed Fibre Channel cable has failed Ensure that the Fibre Channel cables are undamaged and properly connected GBIC has failed 1 Ensure GBIC is seated properly 2 Replace GBIC RAID controller has no power or has failed 1 Ensure that the unit is powered on 2 Replace RAID controller Expansion loop Drives are improperly installed or not installed Ensure that the drives are properly installed RAID controller has no power or has failed 1 Ensure that the unit is powered on 2 Replace the RAID controller 3542 drive failure Replace the drive Externally attached expansion port device has failed 1 Replace the drive 2 Replace the expansion unit GBIC or Fibre Channel cable Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 115 Table 21 Storage controller troubleshooting continued Problem indicator Component Possible cause Possible solutions Intermittent or sporadic Some or all Defective AC power 1 Check the AC power power loss to the CRUs source or partially source storage controller Reseat all installed power cables and power supplies 3 If applicable check the power components 4 Replace defective power cords Check for a Fault LED on the power supply and replace the failed CRU plugged in power 2 cord Power supply has failed Midplane has failed Have t
67. performance of the Model 326 in an NFS environment by adding more RAM to its processor To do this 1 Purchase two 512M memory DIMMs for each of the two engines as a field upgrade by ordering 5187 5RZ Feature Code 0007 from your IBM representative 2 Follow the instructions in Chapter 3 section Replacing memory modules of the Installation Guide 3 Before rebooting the appliance attach a keyboard and display directly to the rear connectors of the product During the first IPL you will have to read and answer questions about the additional memory you have installed Using the Recovery CD ROM if you have added more processor memory If you have installed more processor memory and EEG use the Recover cP ROM will have to attach a keyboard and display and answer questions about the additional memory that you have installed 84 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter provides basic troubleshooting information to help you resolve some common problems that might occur with the Model 326 components These components are IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ engine see e IBM Ethernet and Fibre Channel network adapters see FAdapter troubleshooting information For the latest troubleshooting guidance symptom fixes and tips go to the IBM support Web site at luww ibm com storage suppori nad This site contains additional information gathered from field experience not
68. resets the persistent image to its state at the time you took the persistent image as does selecting Undo Writes for a read write persistent image from the Persistent Images panel Retention value A persistent image can be given a relative retention value or weight This is important when PSM needs to delete some persistent images for a volume because the capacity of the cache file for that volume has reached a certain threshold as described later in this section If the volume cache file completely fills then all persistent images for that volume are deleted regardless of the retention values By default a new persistent image is assigned a Normal retention value there are other higher and lower values which can be selected e Delete an existing persistent image e Modify properties of an existing persistent image including read only or read write and retention value Use this panel to schedule persistent images to be taken at specific times this is independent of the scheduled backup function through NAS Backup Assistant described earlier Each PSM schedule entry defines a set of persistent images to be taken starting at a specified time and at a specified interval with each image having the set of properties defined in the entry This allows you to customize scheduled persistent images on a per volume basis For instance you could set a persistent image for one volume to occur every hour and for another volume to occur
69. restart start Disk Management Chapter 7 Managing adapters and controllers 83 d Assign drive letters to the newly found disks and partitions making sure the drive letters match those on the other node Start the Cluster Administrator Create a new disk group under the cluster name On the new disk group name right click and select New gt Resource Enter the Disk and the drive letter to assign to this disk group for example Disk M i For the Resource Type select Physical Disk and click Next j Make sure that both nodes are selected as possible owners and click Next k Under Parameters use the drop down menu to select the new disk drive you want to manage using the Cluster Server and select Finish sa gt 0 I Bring the resource online 3 Perform Steps bi through Bl for any additional disk drives placing new disks into new disk groups 4 Power on the first node and wait for resources to come online You can then create additional resources dependencies and failover policies RAID mirroring The Model 326 hardware has a RAID 1 mirroring option using the IBM ServeRAID 4Lx adapter The System and Maintenance partitions are mirrored using two 18 GB hard drives to provide increased reliability and failover capability This RAID option has a stripe size of 8K Memory notes The following sections contain information on adding memory Adding more engine memory to increase performance You can enhance the
70. site service If your warranty provides for on site service you can upgrade to premium on site service 4 hour average on site response 24 hours a day 7 days a week You also can extend your warranty Warranty and Repair Services offers a variety of post warranty maintenance options Availability of the services varies by product For more information about warranty upgrades and extensions e In the U S call 1 800 426 4343 In Canada call 1 800 465 7999 e In all other countries contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 133 134 Model 326 User s Reference Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages This appendix identifies and describes POST messages that you might encounter and gives corrective actions where applicable Note The information in this appendix applies to each engine in the appliance For example when the text reads When a monitor and keyboard is attached to the appliance that means that a monitor and keyboard has been attached to either of the two engines Power on self test POST When you turn on your Model 326 its engine performs a power on self test POST to check the operation of appliance components and some of the options installed in the appliance If POST finishes without detecting any problems when a monitor and keyboard are not attached to the appliance you will hear one long and three short beeps When a monitor and keyboa
71. storage spanning nine disks The storage is formatted as an array at RAID level 5 consisting of the following logical unit numbers LUNs ALUN of 500 MB for the Quorum drive drive letter G e A second LUN composed of the remaining space and used as a shared drive with one built in hot spare To use this default preconfigured storage validate all storage areas and determine that the drive letters are the same on each node Otherwise from one of the two nodes define all storage arrays using Storage van n and then set up a partitions as defined in Attention When you set up the shared storage you must configure the storage on one node only During the setup of shared storage leave the joining node powered off Step 3 Complete network setup and cluster installation 4 Model 326 User s Reference 1 Power on either node This becomes the first node 2 Set up the first node a Networking setup at the beginning of that section b Domain setup 3 Power off the first node 4 Power on the other node the joining node 5 Set up the joining node a Networking setup b Shared storage setup For the joining node the only part of this step that you must complete is assigning drive letters on the shared storage make sure that the drive letters are the same as those on the first node d Power off the joining node 6 Power on the first node and complete TN 7 Power on the joining node and comple
72. subnetwork as for more details Note that the values for Min IP ren Mex IP address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway must be in the same range that the IAACU is configured The IAACU must be running to configure newly installed appliances automatically The system running the IAACU Console automatically maintains a copy of its database ServerConfiguration dat in the Advanced Appliance Configuration Station installation directory To remove previous configuration data close the IAACU delete this file and then restart the utility This deletes all previously configured Families However the IAACU will automatically discover connected appliances and their network settings Initial network adapter selection and connection to the IAACU Unlike the limited number of network adapter placement options in the previous release in this release there are an increased number of network adapter types and or locations from which you can connect Assuming you have a keyboard and monitor attached perform the following steps to take into account the new adapter placement options 1 Decide which adapter will be used to connect to the IAACU and connect the appropriate cable type Open the Network and Dial up Connections panel From the desktop right click My Network Places and select Properties Determine the connection name of the adapter you have selected to use Move the mouse cursor over the adapter name and a description of the
73. teams and VLANs 5 From the Windows Control Panel select Add Remove Programs 6 Uninstall PROSet LED indicators e ACT LNK Green on The adapter is connected to a valid link partner Green flashing Data activity is detected Off No link is detected Yellow flashing There is an identity problem Use the Identify Adapter button in Intel PROSet II to control the blinking See the PROSet online help for more information 10 OFF 100 GREEN 1000 YLW Off The adapter is operating at a 10 Mbps data rate Green on The adapter is operating at a 100 Mbps data rate Yellow on The adapter is operating at a 1000 Mbps data rate Troubleshooting the ServeRAID 4Lx Error codes and messages display on the screen in a line of text immediately after the adapter BIOS version If POST detects changes in the controller configuration or detects a controller hardware problem messages appear on the screen Refer to ermer correct the problem If there is no POST Error or Configuration Error message the BIOS screen messages resemble the sample shown below Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 103 Note Your version might be different from the one shown a 5 IBM ServeRAID BIOS Copyright IBM Corp 1994 2001 All rights reserved BIOS Ver 4 84 01 Controller 1 Slot 3 Logical drive 3 Other 0 Firmware 4 70 17 Status 0K lt lt Press Ctrl I to access the Mini Configuration Program gt gt Initializing ServeRAID
74. tests For additional information relating to FAStT MSJ diagnostic functions refer to the online help accessed from ts panels Checking the FAStT host bus adapter s Fibre Channel connectivity In addition to the above diagnostic function you can use FAStT MSJ to determine if the physical Fibre Channel connections are in place by doing the following steps 1 Once connected with FAStT as above select the Adapter QLA2200 or Adapter QLA2202icon and verify that you see all fiber controllers that you are physically connected to If you see a red X on the adapter icon and the icon is yellow the adapter cannot register with the 3534 Fibre Channel hub A green icon means connections are in place Check the fiber cable connections and if the host bus adapter still does not connect run the adapter and 3534 Fibre Channel hub diagnostics If the icon is green click on the plus sign in front of the adapter icon to see the state of the attached Fibre Channel storage controllers The absence of controllers in the display indicates connection problems For additional information relating to FAStT MSJ diagnostic functions refer to the FAStT MSJ online help Testing the Integrated System Management Processor Te Insert the ISMP Utility CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and restart the Model 326 engine If the engine does not boot from the CD ROM use POST BIOS setup to configure the CD ROM drive as a boot device After the engine boots
75. that it is not configured to monitor any devices Select Yes to have it search for subsystems If the subsystems do not appear then the IP address assigned to each storage subsystem controller in the 5191 RAID Storage Controller must be identified so it can be input into the Storage Manager Application To identify the IP addresses 1 Record the Ethernet MAC addresses of each storage subsystem controller in the 5191 RAID Storage Controller Unit The MAC address is located on a label directly under the RJ 45 Ethernet port on the rear of each storage subsystem controller for example a MAC address could appear as 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 On the DHCP server locate the IP addresses either two or four that were assigned to the MAC addresses of the storage subsystem controllers 3 From the Storage Manager Enterprise Management window select Edit gt Add Device and add the IP addresses that were assigned to the storage subsystem controllers The storage can now be managed using the external Ethernet connection regardless of the state of the Node A and Node B engines 30 Model 326 User s Reference Starting Enterprise Management The Enterprise Management window is the first window to open when you start the Storage Manager Application Use Enterprise Management to e Add and discover the storage subsystem you want to manage Provide a comprehensive view of all storage subsystems in your management domain e Perform batch storage subs
76. the integrated onboard 10 100 Intel Ethernet controller on the engine With adapter teaming two or more PCI Ethernet adapters can be physically connected to the same IP subnetwork and then logically combined into an adapter team Such a team can support one of the following functional modes Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT Only one adapter in the team is fully active on the Ethernet network for example sending and receiving data at any point in time while the other adapters are in standby mode receiving data only If that adapter detects a link failure or fails completely another adapter in the team automatically and rapidly takes over as the active adapter and all Ethernet traffic being handled by the failing adapter is seamlessly switched to the new active adapter with no interruption to network sessions for example file transfers in progress at the time of the failover Adapter Load Balancing ALB All adapters in the team are active increasing the total transmission throughput over the common IP subnetwork If any adapter in the team fails link failure or complete failure the other adapters in the team continue to share the network transmission load although total throughput is decreased Load balancing is only supported for adapter teams consisting of only one type of adapter different types of adapters cannot be combined in a load balancing team Fast Etherchannel FEC 802 3ad FEC is a proprietary technology deve
77. the selected persistent image was taken This is useful if you need to recover an entire volume as opposed to just a few files This volume restore function is available for the data volumes but not the system volume Disaster Recovery PSM provides a disaster recovery solution for the system drive This extends the volume restore function of PSM to provide disaster recovery in the event that the system drive is corrupted to the point where the file system is corrupt or the operating system is unbootable Note that while disaster recovery is also supported through the Recovery CD ROM and backup and restore capability it is a two step process In contrast the method supported by PSM allows you to restore the system drive from a single image without having to go through the entire recovery procedure and then additionally having to restore a system drive backup Use the Disaster Recovery panel to schedule and create backup images of the system drive and to create a bootable diskette which will allow you to restore the system drive from a backup image located on the maintenance partition or network drive The remainder of this section provides additional information on how to perform backup and recovery operations for the Model 326 Note Restoration of a PSM backup image over the network is not supported for the Gigabit Ethernet Adapter If you have only Gigabit Ethernet adapters installed it is recommended that you perform PSM backup of ea
78. up and configuring the Model 326 Following these directions and referring to the appropriate sections of this book will help you in this task Prerequisites A domain controller must exist on the network and a login ID must be defined for each node to log on Each node must join the same domain All Windows shared disks must be defined as basic Windows 2000 dynamic disks are not supported A Quorum drive must be available to both nodes and have the same drive letter on each node All disks shared between the two cluster nodes must have the same drive letter All shared storage must be defined as NTFS and be on primary partitions Compression cannot be enabled on any disk partition Each node must have one private and one public adapter Cluster setup requirements Configuration and administration tools The Model 326 is a network attached storage appliance that has several different methods of configuration depending on your environment First determine how you will manage the device You can manage the Model 326 in headless mode or with a keyboard display and mouse ation on page 9 for information on managing this device using a NT display and mouse For headless management of the Model 326 you can use one of the following tools Terminal Services for remote configuration and management from another device on the network Universal Manageability Services UMS for management through a Web brow
79. virtual volume underneath the persistent images directory on the real volume for which the persistent image was created Mapping takes place five minutes after the real volume has been mounted The mapping time varies with the number of persistent images as well as the size of the volume As an example suppose that on your Model 326 you defined a 1 TB volume with 50 percent of the volume allocated to the cache 500 GB cache and that you had 20 persistent images on the volume using 100 GB 20 percent of the cache based on the write activity to the volume since the first persistent image was created You would observe an increase in the Model 326 startup time of roughly 3 minutes 20 seconds over what it would be without any persistent images on the volume Then once the Model 326 has become fully operational all 20 persistent images would become accessible within another 18 minutes including the five minutes that PSM waits after the volume comes up to begin the mapping When a volume is failed over between nodes then PSM must perform persistent image loading and mapping on the node to which the volume is moving just as it does when the first node is restarted In the failover scenario loading must take place before the volume can be brought online on the node when the clustered disk resource is shown as being Online in Cluster Administrator Then as in the restart case mapping begins five minutes after the volume comes onli
80. volume Persistent Images This panel lists all of the persistent images that exist on all volumes On this panel you can Create a new persistent image immediately without scheduling it through the Schedules panel When you create the persistent image you can specify properties for the persistent image including Volume s The persistent image can contain a single volume or multiple volumes To select multiple volumes hold down the Ctrl key while clicking the volumes For multi volume persistent images a virtual directory containing data for a volume appears under the persistent image directory in the top level of each volume in the persistent image the name of the persistent image directory is configured in the Global Settings panel 62 Model 326 User s Reference Schedules Name You can name the persistent image This becomes the name of the virtual directory containing the persistent image underneath the persistent image directory in the top level of the volume the name of the persistent image directory is configured in the Global Settings panel Read only or read write A persistent image is read only by default so no modifications can be made to it However you can set the persistent image to read write which permits you to modify it When a persistent image is written the modifications made are also persistent they survive a reboot of the system Changing a persistent image from read write to read only
81. you identify problems These LEDs are part of the light path diagnostics that are built into the Model 326 engine By following the path of lights you can quickly identify the type of system error that occurred See 88 for more information e Networking adapter diagnostic tools Intel PROSet II e Troubleshooting charts These charts list problem symptoms along with suggested steps to correct the problems See e Support You can register with the following support site to subscribe to e mail notification of new technical tips and frequently asked questions obtain downloads and join forum discussions hwww ibm com storage suppori nas Identifying problems using LEDs The LEDs are part of the light path diagnostics built into the Model 326 engine The LEDs help you identify the type of system error that occurred See the following sections for more information Power supply LEDs The AC and DC power LEDs on the power supply provide status information about the power supply Table 7 on page 87 describes the AC and DC power LEDs Note The minimum configuration required for the DC good light to come on is e Power supply e Power backplane e System board with pins 2 and 3 on J23 extension cable connected together to bypass the power switch 86 Model 326 User s Reference Table 7 Power supply LEDs AC Good LED Off DC Good LED Off Description No power to system or AC problem FRU action
82. 0 PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 HVD FC1 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID Ethernet ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 ServeRAID Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID Ethernet ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 ServeRAID Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC2 Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 198 Model 326 User s Reference Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit SCSI LVD SE Ethernet SCSI ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 ServeRAID FC2
83. 0 ServeRAID FC2 FC1 ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 FC1 ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI LVD SE PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 SCSI PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 FC1 SCSI ServeRAID FC1 FC1 LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 Table 47 Five adapter configuration Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Quad SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE Quad Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 RSA SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Quad SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE Quad Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 RSA SCSI Quad Gigabit FC2 LVD SE RSA Quad PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Quad PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 LVD SE RSA Quad PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC2 RSA SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 RSA SCSI Quad Gigabit FC1 LVD SE RSA Quad Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 RSA SCSI HVD Quad Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Quad PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Quad PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 RSA SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000
84. 000 FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 SCSI ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Quad SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 FC1 SCSI HVD ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet SCSI Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet SCSI FC2 LVD SE FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet SCSI Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet SCSI FC1 LVD SE FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 FC2 Appendix H Adapter placement tables 195 Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC2 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit Ethernet SCSI SE Ethernet Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 Ethernet S
85. 000 FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA ServeRAID SCSI SE FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 RSA SCSI Gigabit Gigabit FC2 LVD SE RSA Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD FC2 RSA SCSI HVD _ Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 LVD SE RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD RSA SCSI HVD PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI RSA SCSI PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE FC2 LVD SE beg PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD RSA SCSI HVD PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 RSA SCSI Gigabit Gigabit FC1 LVD SE RSA Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 RSA SCSI HVD _ Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE 192 Model 326 User s Reference Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD RSA SCSI HVD PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI RSA SCSI PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE FC1 LVD SE RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD RSA SCSI HVD PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RS
86. 01 250 000 Failed System board ECC System board 001 250 001 Failed Processor board ECC 41 Processor PCI board 2 System board 005 XXX 000 Failed Video test System board 011 XXX 000 Failed COM1 Serial Port test System board 011 XXX 001 Failed COM2 Serial Port test System board 148 Model 326 User s Reference Table 28 Diagnostic error messages continued Error Code Meaning FRU action 014 XXX 000 Failed Parallel Port test System board 015 XXX 001 Failed USB test System board 015 XXX 015 Failed USB external loopback 4 Make sure parallel port is not disabled i 2 Re run USB external loopback test 3 System board 015 XXX 198 USB di ng 1 Remove USB devices from USB1 and USB2 during Me USE test 2 Re run USB external loopback test 3 System board 020 XXX 000 Failed PCI Interface test System board 020 XXX 001 Failed Hot Swap Slot 1 PCI 1 PCI hot swap latch assembly Latch test 2 System board 020 XXX 002 Failed hot swap slot 2 PCI 1 PCI hot swap latch assembly latch test 2 System board 020 XXX 003 Failed hot swap slot 3 PCI 1 PCI hot swap latch assembly latch test 2 System board 020 XXX 004 Failed hot swap slot 4 PCI 1 PCI hot swap latch assembly latch test 2 System board 030 XXX 000 Failed internal SCSI interface System board test 035 XXX 099 No adapters were found If the adapter is installed recheck the connection 035 XXX S99 Failed RAID test on PCI s
87. 10 FT CAT5 ETHERNET CROSSOVER CABLE FRU 38P8356 TOP COVER SERVICE LABEL 10L7095 PCI FAST WIDE ULTRA SCSI ADAPTER 09N7292 NETFINITY FAST HOST ADAPTER 06P5067 REMOTE SUPERVISOR ADAPTER 03K9319 RSA INTERCONNECT CABLE RS485 PEER 02K6555 RSA AC ADAPTER 06P3609 NETFINITY 10 100 ETHERNET ADAPTER 06P3709 NETFINITY 1 GB ETHERNET ADAPTER 00N6407 BLANK 5 25 HDD BEZEL SNAP MOUNT 06P5923 BAFFLE O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 177 Table 39 5197 6RZ Engine continued CRU number System part 00N7193 MISC RACK HARDWARE KIT 00N7211 BRACKET CABLE MGMT CHASSIS ATTACH 2 00N7242 CABLE MANAGEMENT ARM ASSEMBLY 2 00N7245 CABLE MANAGEMENT ARM ASSEMBLY 2 06P5922 POWER CABLE 06P5978 SIGNAL CABLE 06P2215 SCSI LVD SE ADAPTER 38P7829 10 100 ENET 4 PORT ADAPTER 00N7691 06P5864 CORD JUMPER 1M CABLE RSA 09N9581 38P7771 CABLE RS485 BUS CABLE 10FT CAT 5 UTP STRAIGHT THROUGH Table 40 5191 0RU RAID Storage Controller CRU number System part 38P8294 M T 5191 2RU RAID CNTRL FINAL ASSEMBLY 3710198 DASD BEZEL FILLER ASM 38P7638 FRONT BEZEL 5191 0RU 19K1164 POWER SUPPLY ASM 350 W 09N7285 BLOWER ASM 19K1115 FC CONTROLLER 37L0067 RAIL KIT LEFT RIGHT 06P5763 HDD 36 4 GB 06P5764 HDD 73 4 GB 03K9206 GBIC MODULE SW 37L0083 CABLE 1M Table 41 5192 0RU Storage Unit
88. 12 and ping 192 168 2 12 for the first node and you would type ping 192 168 1 13 and ping 192 168 2 13 for the joining node You can do this from any machine that is physically connected to the network of each node To view the addresses use the ipconfig command on each node 1 Click Start gt Run type cmd in the text box and click OK to bring up an MS DOS prompt 2 Type ipconfig all and press Enter IP information should appear for all network adapters in the machine Checking or changing the network binding order The clustering function requires the following binding order e Private e Public 1 e Public 2 The top most connection is first in the binding order Typically this is the most frequently used network adapter To check the binding order and change it 1 From the desktop right click My Network Places and then select Properties 2 Select Advanced Settings from the Advanced menu 3 Reorder the position of the adapters by selecting them then pressing the up or down arrow keys then clicking OK Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup 39 If prompted to restart click No If you change the binding order you do not have to reboot until after you join the node to the domain Joining a node to a domain All nodes in the cluster must be members of the same domain and be able to access a Primary Domain Controller PDC and a DNS Server Note The administrator must have a valid do
89. 2 Quad ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID Quad FC1 Quad FC2 FC1 Quad FC1 FC2 Quad FC1 FC1 Quad FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet FC2 Ethernet Ethernet FC2 Ethernet Ethernet FC1 Ethernet Ethernet FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE FC1 Ethernet Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Gigabit FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet Gigabit FC1 Ethernet Gigabit FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet SCSI LVD SE FC2 Ethernet SCSI FC2 LVD SE Ethernet SCSI HVD FC2 Ethernet SCSI HVD FC2 Ethernet SCSI LVD SE FC1 Ethernet SCSI FC1 LVD SE Ethernet SCSI HVD FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet FC2 FC1 Ethernet FC1 FC2 Ethernet FC1 FC1 Ethernet FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID FC2 SCSI SE ServeRAID FC2 SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 SCSI SE FC1 FC1 SCSI SE FC1 FC1 Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 Gigabit Gigabit FC1 Gigabit Gigabit FC1 Appendix H Adapter placement tables 183 Table 45 Three adapter configuration continued
90. 2 RSA SCSI HVD Ethernet Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 LVD SE RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI HVD RSA SCSI HVD Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 RSA SCSI HVD Ethernet Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI HVD RSA SCSI HVD Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID Ethernet Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID Ethernet Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC2 FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC2 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE RSA Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID RSA SCSI HVD Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 FC2 RSA Ethernet SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Appendix H Adapter placement tables 191 Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Sl
91. 2 FAStT MSJ 2 IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility agent IAACU 1 IBM Director Agent 2 IBM Director Agent and Universal Manageability Server Extensions 1 IBM FASET MSJ 1 IBM FAStT Storage Manager for Windows 2000 Version 2 Intel PROSet II 1 2 Microsoft Cluster Service 1 2 Microsoft Services for UNIX 1 Microsoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage 1 2 Microsoft Windows Terminal Services 1 2 ServeRAID Manager RAID Configuration and Monitoring 1 Tivoli SANergy 1 Tivoli Storage Manager Client 1 2 private network adapter configuring 37 PRO 1000 XT Server adapter adapter teaming 83 problem solving 85 PSM Persistent Storage Manager 61 PSM recovery diskette creating 65 restoring system drive using 66 public local area connection configuring 38 Index 223 Q quick start for setting up configuring administering the appliance 25 Quorum drive 29 prerequisite of 3 purpose of 29 recovering from a corrupted Quorum drive 50 R RAID mirroring 84 rebuilding the maintenance partition 67 recovering BIOS 92 Recovery and Supplementary CDs using 123 Recovery CD ROM and additional processor memory 84 Recovery Enablement Diskette and Recovery CD using 123 Remote Supervisor Adapter RSA 78 110 renaming storage subsystems 32 replacing hot swap drives 116 replacing the battery 93 resource balancing 42 restoring backups 60 restoring system drive using the PSM recovery diskette 66 roadmap for setup and configuration 3
92. 2 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 RSA SCSI Gigabit FC2 LVD SE RSA Gigabit SCSI HVD FC2 RSA SCSI HVD _ Gigabit FC2 RSA PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC2 RSA SCSI PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE RSA PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC2 RSA SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 RSA SCSI Gigabit FC1 LVD SE RSA Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 RSA SCSI HVD _ Gigabit FC1 RSA PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 RSA SCSI PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE RSA PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 RSA SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC1 RSA SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC2 RSA SCSI ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 RSA SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 RSA SCSI ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID FC2 FC1 RSA ServeRAID FC1 FC2 RSA FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA FC1 FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE Quad Gigabit FC2 Appendix H Adapter placement tables Table 46 Four adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 FC2 Quad SCSI SE G
93. 34 SAN Fiber Channel Managed Hub User s Guide or the 2109 Model Sxx User s Guide Running diagnostics on the hub There are three methods to access the hub for running diagnostics All methods involve the use of Telnet commands and differ only in the initial login requirement and the access level given to the user Attaching to the serial port while the hub is off 1 If you can attach your service terminal to the hub before turning it on you are automatically logged on as the administrator ID and can issue all diagnostic commands You can watch the progress of the POST diagnostics as they are posted to your service terminal If you can attach this way attach your service terminal to the serial port on the front of the hub and start a terminal emulation session on your service terminal Start up the hub by plugging the power cord into an electrical outlet As the hub executes a POST you will see the results posted When the hub has completed POST you are logged on as administrator The hub leaves the terminal session open Press Enter The hub responds with Admin gt You can perform any of the diagnostics described in this section by typing the appropriate command The hub shows the results as the diagnostic progresses Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub 157 Attaching to the serial port while the hub is on 1 If the hub is on you can attach your service terminal login and run most
94. 92 Model 326 User s Reference Model 326 engine to start up and to read a flash diskette The flash utility recovers the system BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the diskette To recover the BIOS peripheral devices see EPowering off and 1 Disconnect all external cables and Power off the Model 326 engine and power cords Remove the cover Locate the boot block jumper block J16 on the system board See Figure al Place a jumper on pins 2 and 3 to enable the BIOS backup page Insert the BIOS flash diskette into the diskette drive Restart the Model 326 engine When the Model 326 engine completes POST select 1 Update POST BIOS from the menu that contains various flash update options At the prompt to move the current POST BIOS image to the backup ROM location type N Attention Typing Y will copy the corrupted BIOS into the secondary page At the prompt to save the current code on a diskette select N At the prompt select your language 0 7 and press Enter to accept your choice You will be prompted to remove the diskette and press Enter to restart the system Remove the flash diskette from the diskette drive Power off the Model 326 engine Remove the jumper on the boot block jumper block or move it to pins 1 and 2 to return to normal startup mode Restart the Model 326 engine It should start up normally Figure 3 shows the location of the boot block jumper on the system board
95. A Gigabit PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC1 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC2 RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID RSA SCSI ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 FC2 LVD SE RSA Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE RSA PRO 1000 SCSI HVD ServeRAID RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA Gigabit SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID RSA SCSI ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE RSA SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE RSA PRO 1000 SCSI HVD ServeRAID RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 F
96. BIOS hard disk drive Hard disk drive 3 test Note If RAID is configured the hard disk drive number refers to the RAID logical array 217 XXX 003 Failed BIOS hard disk drive Hard disk drive 4 test Note If RAID is configured the hard disk drive number refers to the RAID logical array 217 XXX 004 Failed BIOS hard disk drive Hard disk drive 5 test Note If RAID is configured the hard disk drive number refers to the RAID logical array 217 XXX 005 Failed BIOS Fixed Disk test Hard disk drive 6 Note If RAID is configured the hard disk drive number refers to the RAID logical array 264 XXX ONN Failed tape drive test 1 Tape cartridge if user executed the read write tape drive test XXX 256 2 SCSI or power cable connected to tape drive with SCSI ID NN 3 Tape drive with SCSI ID NN Refer to the Help and Service Information appendix of the tape drive s user guide 4 System board or SCSI Controller Run SCSI controller diagnostic to determine if the SCSI bus is functioning correctly 264 XXX 999 Errors on multiple tape drives See error messages text in the PC Doctor error log for detailed information on each individual tape drive error 301 XXX 000 Failed Keyboard test Keyboard 405 XXX 000 Failed Ethernet test on controller on the system board 1 Verify that Ethernet is not disabled in BIOS 2 System board 152 Model 326 User s Reference Table 28 Diagnostic error messages continued
97. C1 RSA SCSI Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI HVD _ Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 RSA SCSI PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Appendix H Adapter placement tables Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 FC1 RSA ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC2 FC1 RSA ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 RSA Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA FC1 FC1 FC1 Gigabit RSA PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA FC1 FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 RSA SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 RSA SCSI ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC2 SCSI SE Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 Quad SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 SCSI SE Quad Gigabit Gigabit
98. CSI SE Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit Ethernet SCSI SE Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 Ethernet SCSI SE Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID Ethernet SCSI SE Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID Ethernet SCSI SE Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE FC2 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Ethernet FC1 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI SE FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Ethernet FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit SCSI Ethernet Ethernet SCSI Gigabit FC2 LVD SE FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC2 HVD FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit SCSI Ethernet Ethernet SCSI Gigabit FC1 LVD SE FC1 L
99. CSI backplane LED 4 scsi backplane est 2 SCSI backplane cable 3 System board 180 XXX 006 Memory Board LED test Suspected part 1 Memory 2 Processor PCI board 3 System board 180 361 003 Failed fan LED test 1 Fans 2 System board 201 XXX ONN Failed Memory test 1 DIMM Location DIMM1 DIMM4 where NN can be a value from 01 to 04 01 DIMM2 02 DIMM1 03 DIMM4 04 DIMM3 2 System board 201 XXX 999 Multiple DIMM failure see 1 See error text for failing DIMMs error text for failing DIMMs 2 System board 202 XXX 001 Failed system cache test 1 VAM 1 2 Microprocessor 1 202 XXX 002 Failed system cache test 1 VRM 2 2 Microprocessor 2 206 XXX 000 Failed diskette drive test 1 Cable 2 Diskette drive 3 System board 215 XXX 000 Failed IDE CD ROM test 1 CD ROM drive cables 2 CD ROM drive 3 System board 217 198 XXX Could not establish drive 1 Check cable and termination parameter 2 SCSI backplane 3 Fixed disk Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 151 Table 28 Diagnostic error messages continued Error Code Meaning FRU action 217 XXX 000 Failed BIOS hard disk drive Hard disk drive 1 test Note If RAID is configured the hard disk drive number refers to the RAID logical array 217 XXX 001 Failed BIOS hard disk drive Hard disk drive 2 test Note If RAID is configured the hard disk drive number refers to the RAID logical array 217 XXX 002 Failed
100. Click the IBM NAS Admin icon on the desktop In the left pane click File Systems gt Shared Folders gt Sessions 4 The users currently using the storage are displayed To close those sessions use a right click Before you close a session notify the user that you are going to close the session by clicking Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt and then issuing the net send hostname messagetext command w IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility Note Although you can do so it is recommended that you not change the default computer name of your NAS appliance to avoid the chance of propagating misidentification through the system Also The IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility depends on the original name to function The IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility IAACU helps you to set up and reconfigure the network configuration on the Model 326 appliance as well as other IBM appliances The IAACU agent preinstalled on the Model 326 appliance works with the IAACU Console a Java based application that is installed on a network attached system You can use the IAACU as a systems management console to automatically detect the presence of Model 326 appliances on the network After the Model 326 appliance is detected by the IAACU Console use the IAACU to set up and manage the appliance s network configuration including assigning the IP address default gateway network mask and DNS server to be
101. Corp 2002 127 Trademarks Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM the IBM logo IBM Director ServeRAID ServerGuide TotalStorage NetView SecureWay Tivoli and WebSphere are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation or Tivoli Systems Inc in the United States other countries or both Alacritech and SLIC Technology are registered trademarks of Alacritech Inc in the United States other countries or both Intel LANDesk MMX Pentium Pentium II Xeon and Pentium III Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States other countries or both Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countries or both Lotus and Domino are trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation in the United States other countries or both Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation NetWare is a trademark of Novell Inc Persistent Storage Manager is a trademark of Columbia Data Products Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States other countries or both and
102. ECS 20 Following drives not responding old state new state ch SID RDY EMP 2 0 The system has a configuration error due to above condition s Press F4 Retry the command F5 Update Controller configuration to exclude NON RESPONDING drives Warning NON RESPONDING drives will be set to DDD DHS or EMP state F10 Exit without change Note Do not replace a ServeRAID 4 controller or a system board containing an embedded ServeRAID 4 controller for ServeRAID problems unless replacing the controller is listed in 104 Model 326 User s Reference POST ISPR error procedures The Interrupt Status Port Register ISPR Error Procedures list errors symptoms and the possible causes The most probable cause is listed first Use these procedures to help you solve ServeRAID poes when servicing the computer A complete list of error codes is in EF10 Default ISPR No ISPR error present 9ZXX thru BZXX SCSI bus error caused either by cables termination defective drives and so on 1 Isolate the error between SCSI subsystem and controller by disconnecting all SCSI cables from suspect card and reboot CAUTION Do not press F5 Doing so changes the configuration If an ISPR error is still present take the following actions until the error is no longer present a Reseat the controller b Replace the controller Note If the controller detects a configuration change do not choose Save Changes Instead press
103. FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit FC2 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 FC2 RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA Quad SCSI SE ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID SCSI SE Quad FC2 RSA Quad SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID SCSI SE Quad FC1 RSA Quad SCSI SE FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Quad FC1 FC1 Appendix H Adapter placement tables Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 RSA SCSI Quad Gigabit FC2 LVD SE RSA Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 RSA SCSI Quad Gigabit FC1 LVD SE RSA Quad
104. I Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Quad Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit FC2 RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 RSA Quad Gigabit FC1 184 Model 326 User s Reference Table 46 Four adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Quad PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC2 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC1 RSA Ethernet Ethernet FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE FC2 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE FC2 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI SE FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC2 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet Gigabit FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 RSA PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC
105. IBM TotalStorage Network Attached Storage 300 Model 326 alf User s Reference Release 2 5 GA27 4276 02 Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information in First Edition June 2002 This edition applies to Release 2 5 of the IBM 5195 TotalStorage Network Attached Storage 300 Model 326 product number 5195 326 and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office servicing your locality Publications are not stocked at the address below IBM welcomes your comments form for reader s comments is provided at the back of this publication If the form has been removed you may address your comments to International Business Machines Corporation Design amp Information Development Department CGF PO Box 12195 Research Triangle Park NC 27709 9990 U S A You can also submit comments on the Web at www ibm When you send information to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you O Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2002 All rights reserved US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Figures Tables About this
106. M FRU XXXXXXX e Identification of software problem sources e Configuration of BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade e Changes modifications or upgrades to device drivers e Installation and maintenance of network operating systems NOSs Installation and maintenance of application programs Refer to your IBM hardware warranty for a full explanation of IBM s warranty terms Before you call for service Some problems can be solved without outside assistance by using the online help by looking in the online or printed documentation that comes with your network attached storage appliance or by consulting the support Web page noted in fable 24 on page 12 Also be sure to read the information in any README files that come with your software Your network attached storage appliance comes with documentation that contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error messages The documentation that comes with your appliance also contains information about the diagnostic tests you can perform If you receive a POST error code or beep code when you turn on your Network Attached Server appliance refer to the POST error message charts in your hardware documentation If you do not receive a POST error code or beep code but suspect a hardware problem refer to the troubleshooting information in your hardware documentation or run the diagnostic tests If you suspect a software problem consult the documentation including any README
107. O 1000 FC1 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 FC1 Appendix H Adapter placement tables 187 Table 46 Four adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI Gigabit Gigabit FC2 LVD SE Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 LVD SE Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 LVD SE Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI Gigabit Gigabit FC1 LVD SE Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD Gigabit Gigabit FC1 Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 LVD SE Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 LVD SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Gigabit PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC1 Gigabit
108. OST ISPR error procedures XXX in Table 16 is used as a placeholder and can be any letter or number in an actual error message Table 16 ServeRAID 4Lx problems and actions Problem Action 1XXX Microcode Checksum Error Check the ServeRAID 4Lx controller 2XXX through 5XXX Code DRAM Error 1 Install download jumpers flash latest level BIOS and firmware for controller Remove jumpers Check the ServeRAID 4Lx controller 6XXX Cache DRAM Error ServeRAID 4H only Reseat daughter card Install download jumpers flash latest level BIOS and firmware for controller Remove jumpers 3 Check the ServeRAID 4Lx controller 7XXX through 8XXX Host Local PCI Bus Install download jumpers flash latest Interface Error level BIOS and firmware for controller Remove jumpers 2 Check the ServeRAID 4Lx controller 9ZXX through BZXX SCSI Bus error caused 1 Follow indications in the POST error by cables termination defective drives and so on The Z refers to the specific channel or channels that cause the error instructions before continuing with the next steps listed in this table 2 SCSI cable 3 SCSI backplane 4 Hard drive 5 1 Por Check the ServeRAID 4Lx controller EFFE Firmware code corrupt or download Flash latest level BIOS and firmware for jumpers are in place controller Remove jumpers 2 Check the ServeRAID 4Lx controller 106 Model 326 User s Refere
109. PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC1 Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC2 Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC2 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC2 Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Gigabit SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC2 SCSI ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 LVD SE Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 LVD SE PRO 1000 SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 Gigabit SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 SCSI ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 LVD SE Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 LVD SE PRO 1000 SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 188 Model 326 User s Reference Table 46 Four adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 FC1 ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC2 PRO 100
110. Powered CD ROM If so insert the Supplementary CD and specify path x i386 where x is the drive letter assigned to the CD ROM drive W2KSP2 Windows Powered Service Pack 2 which is preloaded on the Model 326 if you are at Version 1 00 Build 70 or later If you add any device drivers OS features and so on you should reapply Service Pack 2 Run the executable w2ksp2 exe and follow the instructions provided Services for UNIX SFU 2 2 installation files zipped into a self extracting executable sfu22 exe If you add features that are not preloaded you are prompted for these installation files You must extract the installation files onto the hard drive of the Model 326 It is recommended that you use the maintenance drive D drive as the destination but you can use the system drive C drive On whatever drive you choose make sure that you have at least 250 MB of free space available create a temporary directory on the drive and then issue the following command from the Services for UNIX directory on the Supplementary CD sfu22 path where path is the drive letter and path of the temporary directory you created At the prompt specify the same path you specified in extracting the files from the CD Terminal Services Client The stand alone Win32 Terminal Services Client application The Model 326 appliance supports Web based terminal services so this is an optional installation To install the Terminal Services Client
111. RSA Remote Supervisor Adapter 78 110 RSA and ISMP comparison of 79 using 80 S SCSI adapters testing 111 Server for NFS configuring 73 ServeRAlD 4Lx testing 107 troubleshooting 103 troubleshooting chart 106 ServeRAID Manager RAID Configuration and Monitoring 2 setting the date and time 27 setting up configuring administering the appliance quick start 25 setting up the Model 326 25 setting up the network 27 setup and configuration with a keyboard monitor and mouse 9 skills needed to install configure and administer this product xi SNMP support 24 software preloaded Alacritech SLICuser 1 Columbia Data Products Persistent Storage Manager PSM 1 2 FAStT MSJ 2 IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility agent IAACU 1 224 Model 326 User s Reference software preloaded continued IBM Director Agent 2 IBM Director Agent and Universal Manageability Server Extensions 1 IBM FASET MSJ 1 IBM FASET Storage Manager for Windows 2000 Version 2 Intel PROSet II 1 2 Microsoft Cluster Service 1 2 Microsoft Services for UNIX 1 Microsoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage 1 2 Microsoft Windows Terminal Services 1 2 ServeRAID Manager RAID Configuration and Monitoring 1 Tivoli SANergy 1 Tivoli Storage Manager Client 1 2 specifying multiple 10 100 Ethernet adapters 66 sporadic problem locating 120 static IP addressing 65 storage access setup completing 37 Storage Manager 29 Supplementary CD using 125 support on
112. SE Ethernet SCSI Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI LVD SE FC1 Ethernet SCSI Ethernet FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD Ethernet FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID Ethernet FC1 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID Ethernet FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID Ethernet ServeRAID SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 Ethernet ServeRAID SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAlD FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID Ethernet ServeRAID SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 Ethernet ServeRAID SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 Appendix H Adapter placement tables 197 Table 47 Five adapte
113. Text messages The diagnostic text message format is as follows Function Name Result Test Specific String where Function Name The name of the function being tested when the error occurred This corresponds to the function code fff given in the previous list Result Can be one of the following Passed The diagnostic test has completed without any errors Failed The diagnostic test has discovered an error User Aborted You stopped the diagnostic test before it is complete Not Applicable You specified a diagnostic test for a device that is not present Aborted The test could not proceed because of the system configuration Warning A possible problem was reported during the diagnostic test such as when a device that is to be tested is not installed Test Specific String This is additional information that you can use to analyze the problem Starting the diagnostic programs To start the diagnostic programs 1 Connect a monitor keyboard and mouse to your Model 326 engine 2 Power on the Model 326 engine and watch the screen 146 Model 326 User s Reference Notes a When you do not have a monitor keyboard and mouse attached and the Model 326 engine passes POST one long and three short beeps sound b When you have a monitor keyboard and mouse attached and the Model 326 engine passes POST one beep sounds If the Model 326 fails POST a series of beeps sound see more details and an error message appears on th
114. The PSM disaster recovery function enables you to restore the system drive from a single image without having to go through the entire recovery procedure and then additionally having to restore a system drive backup So if any software you install creates unresolvable problems for your system you can regain the stable system you had before you installed the software Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup 51 52 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage This chapter describes the additional administrative functions that you can use to manage and protect the network and storage on the Model 326 The following functions are available FIBM Director accessed through Start gt Programs 9 accessed through IBM NAS Admin accessed through the Windows 2000 for interface IBM Director Note This section presents an overview of IBM Director functions For more detailed information consult the Director User s Guide on the Documentation CD IBM Director is a systems management solution that helps administrators manage single or large groups of IBM and non IBM devices NAS appliances and workstations All of the functionality of IBM Director is contained in a simple GUI that enables single click and drag and drop commands IBM Director can manage up to 5 000 clients depending on configuration density Powerful remote management functions include
115. VD SE Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 FC1 HVD FC1 196 Model 326 User s Reference Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit ServeRAID Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit ServeRAID Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC2 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 Ethernet FC1 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI LVD SE Ethernet SCSI Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI LVD
116. a 4 Processors s Memory S CPUs system board 5 System board 166 260 000 System Management failed Unable to restart Remote Supervisor Adapter Restart Remote Supervisor Adapter Error After restarting Remote Supervisor Adapter communication was lost Unplug and cold boot to reset the Remote Supervisor Adapter Disconnect all server and option power cords from server wait 30 seconds reconnect and retry Reseat the Remote Supervisor Adapter in PCI slot 1 J44 Remote Supervisor Adapter 150 Model 326 Users Reference Table 28 Diagnostic error messages continued Error Code Meaning FRU action 166 342 000 System Management failed 4 Ensure that the latest firmware levels for the Remote Remote Supervisor Adapter Supervisor Adapter and BIOS BIST indicate failed tests i i 2 Disconnect all server and option power cords from the unit wait 30 seconds reconnect then retry 3 Remote Supervisor Adapter 166 400 000 System Management failed 41 Re flash or update firmware for ISMP System management Be ae board hardware on system board System poa failed ISMP Self Test Result failed tests x where x Flash RAM or ROM 180 XXX 000 Diagnostics LED failure Run the diagnostics LED test for the failing LED 180 XXX 001 Failed front LED panel test 180 XXX 002 Failed diagnostics LED panel 4 System board tesi 2 Power switch assembly 180 XXX 005 Failed S
117. abit Gigabit FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC2 Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 ServeRAID FC2 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 LVD SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD ServeRAID SCSI HVD ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 ServeRAID FC1 PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 LVD SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI HVD SCSI HVD ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 FC1 SCSI Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 SCSI HVD Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 SCSI HVD PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 200 Model 326 User s Reference Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued
118. able failure DIAG INTNIL Err 2031 ASIC failed to get a CMI ASIC failure 1 cmiTest error interrupt DIAG INTNOTCLR Err 102C The interrupt bit could not ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest be cleared DIAG LCMEM Err 1027 Data read from the central ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest cmemRetentionTest memory location did not match data previously written into the same location DIAG LCMEMTX Err 1F27 Central memory transmit System board 1028 centralMemoryTest path failure ASIC 1 failed failure to read ASIC 2 using the transmit path DIAG LCMRS Err 1F25 1025 Central memory read short ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest M bytes requested but got cmemRetentionTest less than M bytes DIAG LCMTO Err 1F26 1026 Central memory timeout ASIC failure 1 centralMemoryTest cmemRetentionTest Data transfer initiated did not complete within the timeout period DIAG MEMNULL Err 0112 ramTest DIAG MEMSZ Err 0111 ramTest Test failed to malloc Memory size to be tested is less than or equal to zero System board failure System board failure Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub 167 Table 31 Hub diagnostic error messages continued Message Description Probable cause Action DIAG MEMORY Err 0110 Data read from RAM CPU RAM failure 1 ramTest location did not match previously written data into same location
119. ackup Operations The main window where you create and schedule backup batch jobs Two backup methods you can select in the Backup Operations window are the standard NT Backup method and the Persistent Storage Manager PSM Persistent Image method A standard NT Backup operation backs up only those files on the drive that are not in use To guarantee a complete Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 59 backup image using this method you must ensure that no users are accessing any files on the drive so this method is useful only for offline backup To do a complete online backup that includes files that are in use choose the PSM Persistent Image backup method This method creates a persistent image mapped as an unused drive letter on the system backs up a copy of that persistent image and then deletes the original persistent Scheduled Jobs Displays a list of backup batch jobs that you scheduled Backup Logs Displays a list of log files for each backup that has run Displayed Logs Displays the text contained in the log files that you can select from the Backup Logs tab All of the options on each tab are described in detail in the online help To access the online help A 2 3 4 Click the IBM NAS Admin icon Expand the Backup and Restore directory Select IBM NAS Backup Assistant Help Log in Restoring using the NT Backup panel Note If you are restoring a backup that you created
120. action codes i Hub diagnostic error messages Hub system error messages Host adapter settings Advanced adapter settings Extended firmware settings RIO operation modes Connection options 5186 36U Rack 5197 6RZ Engine 5191 0RU RAID Storage Controller 5192 0RU Storage Unit 3534 1RU Hub g One adapter configuration Two adapter configuration Three adapter configuration Four adapter configuration Five adapter configuration O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 174 174 177 177 178 178 179 181 181 182 184 189 X Model 326 User s Reference About this book This book provides information necessary to configure and administer the IBM 5195 TotalStorage Network Attached Storage 300 Model 326 Hereafter the IBM 5195 TotalStorage Network Attached Storage 300 Model 326 is referred to as the Model 326 Who should read this book This book is for Model 326 administrators The Model 326 administrator should have experience in at least the following skills or have access to personnel with experience in these skills e Microsoft Windows and Windows Advanced Server e Networking and network management e Disk management e SAN management e General technologies of the product such as Microsoft Cluster Service Services for UNIX storage RAID and so on e Critical business issues such as backup disaster recovery security Frequently used terms Th
121. acts as a central point of configuration for Event Action Plans and System Tasks The Agent resides on the NAS Appliances and other systems that IBM Director manages IBM Director recognizes two types of managed systems native agents IBM Director Agent installed and nonnative agents SNMP agent installed The Agent comes preinstalled on all IBM NAS appliances It runs as a service that is automatically started at boot time IBM Director Agent provides valuable information to IBM Director management server and other supported management applications In addition to its native interface with the Director Management Console it provides point to point remote management of client systems through a Web browser window You perform administrative tasks at the Console It is a Java application that serves as the user interface to the Director managed environment The console provides comprehensive hardware management using a single click or drag and drop operation You can install the Console on a machine at a remote location from the server Consoles are not licensed so you can distribute them freely among unlimited number of machines In addition there is no limit to the number of IBM Director Consoles that can connect into the Management Server Dependencies The IBM Director 3 1 Agent the version included in this release must be managed by an IBM Director 3 1 Management Server If your Management Server is running an earlier version of IBM Dire
122. adapter type will appear If this is inconclusive right click the adapter and select Properties Under the General tab click the Configure button The line which contains the location information will provide the adapter s slot location For example Location 1 means the adapter is in PCI slot number 1 Close the adapter properties panel On the Network and Dial up Connections menu bar select Advanced and then Advanced Settings From the Connections menu select the adapter s connection name Then using the down arrow move the selection down to the next to last position in the list The last entry in the list should be the remote access connections shown as the telephone icon Save your changes by clicking OK The IAACU will now detect the appliance using the adapter you have just enabled 14 Model 326 User s Reference IAACU Agent The IAACU agent is preinstalled on the Model 326 appliance After you connect the Model 326 to your network the IAACU agent automatically reports the appliance serial number and type the MAC address of its onboard Ethernet controller and whether DHCP is in use by the appliance Furthermore it reports the host name primary IP address subnet mask primary DNS server address and primary gateway address if these are configured on the system Note The IAACU agent periodically broadcasts the appliance IP settings To prevent the service from broadcasting this data periodically stop the iaaconfig servic
123. ailure Analysis For more information NAS Backup Assistant Restoring using the NT Backup panel Persistent Images Gow f Global Settings Volume Settings Persistent Images Schedules Restore Persistent Images Disaster Recovery Granting user access to persistent image files PSM notes Microsoft Services for UNIX and NFS Support Configuring Server for NFS Antivirus protection Chapter 7 Managing adapters and controllers Managing Fibre Channel host bus adapters Enabling communication between system management adapters Enabling ISMP to RSA communication on a single machine IV Model 326 User s Reference Using the ISMP and RSA Enabling Ethernet adapter teaming Intel adapters Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter PRO 1000 XT Server adapter Adding a second IBM 5191 RAID A Controller Model ORU RAID mirroring G Memory notes Adding more engine memory to increase gt performance Using the Recovery CD ROM if you have added more processor memory Chapter 8 Troubleshooting IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ Engine diagnostic tools overview Identifying problems using LEDs Engine troubleshooting charts Power problems Recovering BIOS Replacing the battery Adapter troubleshooting and diagnostics Troubleshooting the integrated Ethernet adapter Troubleshooting the Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter Troubleshooting the Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethern
124. ains frequently accessed instructions and data to reduce access time cascade To connect in a series or in a succession of stages so that each stage derives from or acts upon the product of the preceding stage catenet A network in which hosts are connected to networks and the networks are interconnected by gateways The Internet is an example of a catenet CDDI See Copper Distributed Data Interface Challenge Handshake Authorization Protocol CHAP A password protection protocol that describes how to authenticate incoming data calls The password is encrypted over the access line CHAP See Challenge Handshake Authorization Protocol CIFS See Windows networking client A computer system or process that requests access to the data services or resources of a server another computer system or process Multiple clients may share access to a common server Synonym for requester client server model A common way to describe network services and the model user processes programs of those services closed network Synonym for closed path closed path A network in which all of the cable paths and wiring closets are directly or indirectly connected Synonymous with closed network cluster In high availability cluster multiprocessing HACMP a set of independent systems called nodes that are organized into a network for the purpose of sharing resources and communicating with each other collision avoidance In carrier sense m
125. also power off any Uninterruptible Power Supplies UPS that regulate power for the Model 326 provided that no other equipment that you want to keep powered on is plugged into the same UPS Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup 49 Powering on the Model 326 when clustering is active 1 Power on any UPS that you powered off in the powering off procedure and allow it to return to normal operation 2 Power on any network hubs or switches that you powered off in the powering off procedure 3 Power on all 5192 Network Attached Storage Storage Units and 3534 Managed Hubs Give the 3534 Managed Hubs about three minutes to start up 4 Power on each 5191 RAID Storage Controller After about three to four minutes the storage controllers will have completed their startup routine You can verify this by making sure that for each drive in the storage controller and for each drive in the storage unit the status LED on the top front of the drive is solid green not blinking for at least five seconds 5 Power on the node that you shut down last in the powering off procedure 6 After the node comes up start Cluster Administrator on that node and make sure that all resources are in an online state or shortly return to that state 7 f no problems exist and all clustered resources are online power on the node that you shut down first in the powering off procedure Each resource for which that node is the preferr
126. ame Select the mapping corresponding to the primary user name from the list of maps and then click Set Primary b Define group mappings as follows 1 Click Show group maps 2 Select the Windows domain name the domain to which you joined the Model 326 earlier in this chapter from the drop down list 3 Click Show Windows Groups to display all of the Windows group names in the Windows domain you selected 4 Click Show UNIX Groups to display all of the UNIX group names in the NIS domain you selected 5 Enter a Windows group name or select one from the list of Windows group names 6 Enter a UNIX group name to be mapped to the Windows group name you specified or select one from the list of UNIX group names 7 Click Add to add the mapping between the UNIX group name and Windows group name to the list of maps 8 If multiple Windows group names are mapped to one UNIX group name select one Windows group name to be the primary group name Select the mapping corresponding to the primary group name from the list of maps and then click Set Primary Click Apply Using the UNIX name space on an NIS domain The following procedure applies whether your NIS server is UNIX based or Windows based implemented as a Windows domain controller running Microsoft Server for NIS 1 Open the IBM NAS Administration console by double clicking the IBM NAS Admin icon on the NAS desktop In the left pane expand File Systems then expand Servi
127. and an error message is written to the system event log The event source is psman5 and the text of the error message is There is insufficient memory available When a volume is failed over between nodes then PSM running on the new node will behave as it would if the volume were being mounted during a restart if that volume s PSM cache would increase the total size of all cache files on that node above 1 TB then PSM blocks the mount and writes the Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 71 insufficient memory available error message to the system event log This will also cause the failover to fail which means that either the volume will try to come online on the original node if it is up or just simply fail to come online at all If you increase the size of any cache such that the total cache size of all volumes on the Model 326 becomes greater than 1 TB and if you do not restart the Model 326 after you change the cache size then no persistent images can be created on the volume for which the cache size increase was made An attempt to create a persistent image on that volume will cause an error message to be written to the system event log The event source is psman5 and the text of the error message is There is insufficient memory available e If you delete the last persistent image on a volume and then immediately attempt to create a new persistent image on that volume the creat
128. and one short beep POST encountered an error on a video adapter If you are using the integrated video controller call for service If you are using an optional video adapter replace the failing video adapter One long and two short beeps A video I O adapter ROM is not readable or the video subsystem is defective If you hear this beep combination twice both the system board and an optional video adapter have failed the test This beep combination might also indicate that the system board contains a failing component One long and three short beeps This series of beeps has two meanings The first means that the POST has completed without detecting errors when a monitor and keyboard is not attached However when a monitor is attached and you hear this series it means the system board video subsystem has not detected a monitor connection to the appliance Ensure that the monitor is connected properly to the appliance If the problem persists replace the monitor Two long and two short beeps POST does not support the optional video adapter This beep combination occurs when you install a video adapter that is incompatible with your appliance Replace the optional video adapter with one that the appliance supports or use the integrated video controller able 25 on page 137 describes the codes and specifies the action to take 136 Model 326 User s Reference POST beep codes Table 25 POST beep codes Symptom FRU action 1 1 2
129. ard 00019502 Processor 2 is not functioning e o p o Check VRM and processor LEDs VRM 2 Processor 2 System board 00019701 Processor 1 failed BIST N Processor 1 System board 00019702 Processor 2 failed BIST N Processor 2 System board 00180100 No room for PCI option ROM IO ES Run Configuration Setup Failing adapter System board 00180200 No more l O space available for PCI adapter O Nop Run Configuration Setup Failing adapter System board 00180300 No more memory above 1 MB for PCI adapter 00180400 O aia Run Configuration Setup Failing adapter System board Je er eal 1 1 Move the failing adapter to slot 1 or 2 2 Run Configuration Setup 3 Failing adapter 4 System board 00180500 PCl option ROM checksum 41 Remove failing PCI card oe 2 System board 00180600 PCI built in self test failure 1 Run Configuration Setup diia ENON 2 Move the failing adapter to slot 1 or 2 3 Failing adapter 4 System board 00180700 General PCI error 1 System board 00180800 2 PCI card 01295085 ECC checking hardware test Processor error 01298001 No update data for processor 14 Ensure that all processors are the same stepping level 1 2 and cache size Processor 1 144 Model 326 User s Reference Table 27 POST error messages continued Error Meaning FRU action code Symptom 01298002 No update data for proc
130. are six PSM tasks in the Disks Persistent Storage Manager group e Global Settings e Volume Settings e Persistent Images e Schedules e Restore Persistent Images Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 61 e Disaster Recovery Each of these tasks are described in the following sections More detailed descriptions and instructions for each of the control panels and topics are covered in the online help Global Settings On this panel you can configure the persistent image system attributes shown in Table 4 Persistent image global settings Attribute Default value Maximum number of persistent images 250 Inactive period 5 seconds Inactive period wait timeout 15 minutes Volume Settings This panel displays statistics for each volume such as total volume capacity free space and cache file size and usage You can also select any volume and configure volume specific PSM attributes for that volume as shown in Table 5 Persistent image volume settings Attribute Default value Cache full warning threshold 80 percent full Cache full persistent image deletion threshold 90 percent full Cache size 15 percent of the total volume capacity Note You cannot change the cache size for a volume while there are persistent images on that volume the Cache size combo box will be disabled You must delete all persistent images on the volume before changing the cache size for that
131. at destroys all data on the disk Appendix F Fast UTIL options 175 Loopback Data Test This option performs a data test using an FC loop or a loopback connector CAUTION Performing this test will disrupt data if tested in a FC loop Select Host Adapter Use this setting to select a specific FAStT Host Adapter if you have multiple FAStT Host Adapters in your system 176 Model 326 Users Reference Appendix G Customer Replaceable Unit CRU list Table 38 through Table 4 Table 38 5186 36U Rack 9 contain the CRU list for this product CRU number System part 38P7576 CABLE 10 FT CAT 5 UTP ETHERNET CROSSOVER 38P7772 CABLE 2M OPTICAL 03K9202 5 METER FIBRE CHANNEL CABLE 36L8858 CORD SUB PDU TO HUB 2FT 36L8859 CORD SUB PDU TO HUB 3FT 36L8860 CORD SUB PDU TO HUB 5FT 00N7691 RSA ADPT POWER CORD FRU Table 39 5197 6RZ Engine CRU number System part 38P8355 TOP COVER 37L0305 92MM X 38 FAN 00N7259 SLIM HARD DISK DRIVE BEZEL FILLER ASSEMBLY 19K0614 18 2 GB SLIM HARD DISK DRIVE 37L0311 POWER SUPPLY WITH MOUNTING 270 WF 38P7644 FRONT BEZEL 36L8645 12 7 MM DISKETTE DRIVE 06P5263 24X CDROM 06P5931 FRAME ASSEMBLY 25P2127 SYSTEM BOARD 33L3325 512 MB RDIMM MEMORY 25P2605 1133 MHZ 133 512K PROCESSOR 24P6893 VOLTAGE REG MOD 06P5924 BAFFLE AIR 38P7771 CABLE 10FT CAT 5 UPT ENET 38P7576
132. ates the need for an advanced map in User Name Mapping as described in User Name Mappingl For best results it is necessary to replicate the UNIX group membership among the mapped users and groups on the NAS by adding the mapped users to the mapped groups You can add Windows users to Windows groups using the IBM NAS Admin Users and Groups folder User Name Mapping Note This section supplements other information on User Name Mapping in this book Decide where the User Name Mapping server will run If the NAS is a single node product the server runs on the NAS For a clustered NAS User Name Mapping clustering is recommended so User Name Mapping can run on both nodes and failover as needed When you have decided where the User Name Mapping server will run complete the following steps Note that you will need to click the Apply button to effect changes to the settings 1 Specify the enumeration source In the IBM NAS Admin follow this path Services for UNIX gt User Name Mapping gt Configuration Then click Network Information Service NIS if you will use an NIS server or specify where the local files reside User Name Mapping rereads its enumeration source on a schedule By default this occurs once a day You can reset the refresh period To force User Name Mapping to reread the enumeration source you can click Synchronize Now on the Configuration panel Note If maps do not seem to synchronize you might need to stop and re
133. book Who should read this book Frequently used terms Publications Descriptions of the Model 326 publications 2 4 Hardcopy publications shipped with the Model 326 Related publications Kos oe end Web sites Chapter 1 Introduction Roadmap for setting up and configuring the Model 326 Cluster setup requirements DE N Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools Using a keyboard monitor and mouse for setup and configuration Summary of configuration and administration tools Ad Terminal Services and the IBM NAS Administration Console Installing Terminal Services Connecting to the desktop through Terminal Services IBM NAS Administration console Determining who is using the network attached storage IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility Initial network adapter selection and connection to the IAACU IAACU Agent IAACU Console f Universal Manageability Services System requirements Starting UM Services Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage Telnet Server support i SNMP support Chapter 3 Getting started Methods for setting up the Model 326 Installing the IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Unity Accessing Universal Manageability Services Initial setup and configuration Setting the date and time Setting up the network Chapter 4 Setting up storage Direct managed method for managing the 5191 RAID Storage Controller Starting Enterprise Management hoe Re oe eR OR
134. ces for UNIX In the left pane click Server for NFS Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup 45 4 In the right pane in the Computer name field enter localhost In the left pane click User Name Mapping 6 In the right pane select Network Information Services NIS then click Maps On the Maps page you can configure simple maps or advanced maps Configure simple maps if the Windows user name and UNIX user name is the same for each UNIX user to be mapped and the Windows group name and UNIX group name is the same for each UNIX group to be mapped Otherwise you should configure advanced maps 7 To configure simple maps select Simple maps and continue with Step ll 8 To configure advanced maps clear the Simple maps check box and continue with Step hol 9 Under the Simple maps check box do the following a Select the Windows domain name the domain to which you joined the Model 326 earlier in this chapter from the drop down list b In the NIS domain field enter the NIS domain name You can also enter the name of a specific NIS server in the NIS server field c Continue with Step 10 Under Advanced maps do the following a Define user mappings as follows 1 Click Show user maps 2 Select the Windows domain name the domain to which you joined the Model 326 earlier in this chapter from the drop down list 3 In the NIS domain field enter the NIS domain name You can also enter the name
135. cess It is strongly recommended that you not disable anonymous access If a client presents a UID that is not recognized Server for NFS can still grant that client a very limited form of access as a special nobody user This is known as anonymous access and you can enable or disable on a per share basis This anonymous user will have very limited access to resources on the NAS it has only the permissions that are granted to the Everybody group in Windows which corresponds to the other or world bits in a POSIX permissions mode Allowing anonymous access is not a security risk so disabling it might provide a false sense of security The real security risk is to grant everyone access to resources that should be protected And disabling anonymous access has one severe consequence it is so unexpected by NFS clients that they may not be able to connect as NFS V3 clients at all and may instead downgrade the connection to use the NFS V2 protocol Antivirus protection You can perform antivirus scanning of Model 326 storage from clients having the appropriate access permissions Also you can install Norton AntiVirus Version 7 5 or later on the Model 326 engine using standard Windows 2000 software installation procedures Depending on configuration options antivirus scanning might use substantial CPU or disk resources Therefore you should carefully select the scanning options and schedule Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network an
136. ch node to its maintenance partition D drive which would allow you to recover if the system volume is corrupt and or unbootable Should the hard disk drive fail completely you would need to use the Recover CD as described in EE the Ade do its original factory er Backing up the system drive The Disaster Recovery panel lists status information for backup operations both scheduled and immediate as well as buttons for starting and stopping a backup operation for configuring backup and for creating a recovery diskette 64 Model 326 User s Reference Click the Modify Settings button to open the Disaster Recovery Settings page Modify the settings for backup as you desire Do not include spaces in the Backup name field When you have modified the settings click the OK button to save the changes On the Disaster Recovery page click the Start Backup button to begin the backup The backup process will first create a persistent image of the system drive C named System Backup Then it will create the backup images from that persistent image and then delete that persistent image when the backup operation is complete Creating a PSM recovery diskette You will now create a bootable PSM recovery diskette which when used to boot up the node will use the backup location settings you configured on the Disaster Recovery Settings page to locate the backup image and restore it to the system drive of the node 1 Insert a blank forma
137. copies of the volume This is done by using a copy on write technique that uses for each volume an area of pre allocated storage the PSM cache file that keeps only those data blocks which have been written since the time you made a persistent image of the volume Persistent Storage Manager PSM allows you to create and preserve images of the Model 326 drives You can take a persistent image immediately or schedule persistent images as one time events or regularly repeated events You can access the PSM tasks in the Disks Persistent Storage Manager task group within the Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage user interface in one of two ways e Open the IBM NAS Admin console on the appliance desktop and select Persistent Storage Manager This automatically launches the Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage user interface and brings up the Disks Persistent Storage Manager page containing the PSM tasks e Start the Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage user interface directly Once you create a persistent image it appears as a directory on the original drive Access rights and permissions from the original drive are inherited by the persistent image Persistent images are used in the same way as conventional drives However unlike conventional drives persistent images are records of the content of the original drive at the time you created the persistent image Persistent images are retained following shutdown and reboot There
138. ctor V2 2 or earlier then you must upgrade it to ensure proper operation This includes Director Consoles as well The IBM Director 3 1 Management Server contains an Agent software distribution package that you can use to upgrade pre version 3 1 Agents This allows easy and automated upgrading of the entire system to version 3 1 You can check the version of IBM Director Agent running on a NAS appliance by issuing http lt system name gt 411 on a local Web browser Hardware requirements It is highly recommended that you install the IBM Director Server on a server separate from the IBM NAS appliance The IBM Director Server running on an IBM NAS appliance will significantly reduce its performance The server must meet these minimum requirements Hardware vendor Must be IBM The management tools of IBM Director and Director Extensions require IBM equipment CPU A 733 MHz PIII processor is recommended Standard PII processors can be functional but these processors might not be sufficient during heavy usage Memory 512 MB RAM is recommended During idle times while using the standard JET database the Management Console can consume 300 MB RAM The number of managed agents active consoles and amount of alerts being processed increases the amount of memory needed Disk Because the Management Server software requires 54 Model 326 User s Reference only 250 MB and the JET database has a maximum size of 1 GB 9 GB of disk space
139. d Remove first drive that does not appear and rerun diagnostic If the remaining drives show up replace the removed drive Fixed disk diagnostic freezes when run Remove the drive being tested at the time of the freeze and rerun the diagnostic If the diagnostic completes successfully replace the removed drive Power problems Power problems can be difficult to troubleshoot For example a short circuit can exist anywhere on any of the power distribution busses Usually a short circuit causes the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition Table 1d lists the power error messages that you might encounter A general procedure for troubleshooting power problems is as follows 1 Power off the system and disconnect the AC cord s Attention Note the special considerations when on the Model 326 engine See powering for details Check for loose cables in the power subsystem Also check for short circuits for example if there is a loose screw causing a short circuit on a circuit board Remove adapters and disconnect the cables and power connectors to all internal and external devices until the Model 326 engine is at minimum configuration required for power on Reconnect the AC cord and power on the Model 326 engine If the engine powers up successfully replace adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is isolated If the engine does not power up from minimal configuration
140. d If the cache file usage is high you can increase the size of the cache file using the PSM Volumes page However because dynamic cache file resizing is not supported in this release you must delete all persistent images currently on that volume first When a shared volume is failed over from one engine in the Model 326 to the other engine the persistent images for that volume move with the volume The Persistent Images panel on a particular engine will display only those persistent images which are on volumes that the engine owns at a point in time If persistent images are scheduled for a volume on a particular engine a scheduled persistent image is created only as long as that engine owns the volume at the time the scheduled persistent image is to occur To ensure that a scheduled persistent image will take place regardless of which engine owns the volume you must do the following 1 Use the Schedules panel to create the schedule on the engine that currently owns the volume 2 Use the Cluster Administrator to move the disk group that contains the volume to the other engine You can only create or edit a schedule for a volume on the engine that currently owns the volume If an engine does not Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 69 own the volume you cannot select the volume when creating a new schedule through the New Persistent Image Schedule panel under Schedules 3 Use the Schedules panel on the othe
141. d initially password but you can change it later note that the password is case sensitive but the user name is not If this is the first time you have accessed the UM Services browser on any appliance from this workstation you will also be prompted to install the Swing and XML Java libraries in your Web browser You can download these libraries from the Model 326 through the network link 2 The UM Services browser starts In the left pane Microsoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage is automatically selected on the Appliance tab In the right pane Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage starts 3 Again you are prompted to authenticate with the administrative user name and password 4 Click Administer this server appliance to bring up the Microsoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage GUI 5 You are now ready to gt begin administering the appliance Details for this task are described in Initial setup and configuration This section provides details on the initial setup and configuration of the Model 326 Note that if you are administering the Model 326 without a keyboard monitor and mouse headless mode you can use one of two methods Terminal Services which provides full administrative function See FTerminal e Windows 2000 for Network Attached Since which rovides a_subset of the full administrative function in Terminal Services See gh provides a subset o the In general you adm
142. d FC loop Incorrect ID settings 1 Ensure that the FC optical cables are undamaged and properly connected 2 Check the drive ID settings Note Change switch position only when the expansion unit is powered off ESM board failure Have one or both ESM boards replaced Random errors Subsystem Midplane failure Have the midplane replaced service technician only Note If you cannot find the problem in the troubleshooting table test the entire system See your storage unit documentation for more detailed information on testing and diagnostic tools Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 121 122 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 9 Using the Recovery and Supplementary CDs Attention Changing the preloaded software configuration of this product including applying or installing unauthorized service packs or updates to preinstalled software or installing additional software products that are not included in either the preloaded image or on the Supplementary CD might not be supported and could cause unpredictable results For updated compatibility information see lvww ibm com storage support nad To correct problems with a preloaded software component back up your user and system data Then use the Recovery CD Set to restore the preloaded software image This chapter describes the applications included on the Supplementary and Recovery CDs and how and when you should use them As an
143. d Web site for the latest troubleshooting guidance and symptom fix tip information go to the IBM support Web site at http www ibm com storage support nas This site contains additional information gathered from field experience not available when this document was developed Xii Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 1 Introduction This appliance offers a storage solution for both Windows UNIX and UNIX like environments including mixed Windows UNIX environments that enable Windows and UNIX clients and servers to share the same Fibre Channel storage With the Model 326 integrated storage appliance your enterprise will gain a scalable network attached storage device that delivers state of the art systems management capabilities and task optimized operating system technology The Model 326 provides your enterprise with increased performance storage capacity and functionality This appliance has been developed for workgroup or department environments with file serving requirements across Windows and UNIX clients e business and numerous applications In addition this device supports Ethernet LAN environments with large or shared end user workspace storage remote running of executables remote user data access and personal data migration This new machine replaces the IBM 5195 Model 325 Enhancements provided by the Model 326 include e Greater granularity in configuring storage size e Twice the maximum storage size e M
144. d administer the appliance e Terminal Services Client e IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility IAACU e Universal Manageability Services e Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage This chapter describes these tools in general and then in detail Using a keyboard monitor and mouse for setup and configuration It is highly recommended that you directly attach a keyboard monitor and mouse to the Model 326 when performing these tasks e Initially setting up and configuring the device e Changing or adding to RAID arrays for example adding a new array with Storage Manager adding a new RAID controller or adding a storage expansion unit e Troubleshooting the device Summary of configuration and administration tools There are several ways to set up and administer the Model 326 Hable 2 on page 10 suggests which tool to use for specific functions but does not list all options or combinations The administrator s training level or preferences might determine an alternate approach from that suggested in the table O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 9 Table 2 Summary of configuration and administration tools for the Model 326 Administration tool Main functions Windows Domain Controller not NAS appliance Users and user groups can be defined and authenticated by the Windows Domain Controller although this is not required IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility IAACU Access a headless Model 326 node pa
145. d storage 75 76 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 7 Managing adapters and controllers This chapter describes the functions that you can use to manage various adapters and controllers installed in the Model 326 The following functions are available Managing Fibre Channel host bus adapters The FASET MSJ diagnostic utility allows you to manage and control Fibre Channel host bus adapters With FAStT MSJ you can e Retrieve and display general information about the adapters e Request and display the real time statistics of adapters e Diagnose operations on the adapters and attached devices e Display the NVRAM parameters of adapters note that you cannot change the parameters e Monitor alarms and indications of the adapters The primary purpose of FAStT MSJ in the Model 326 is to obtain diagnostic information about the Fibre Channel connections To use FAStT MSJ 1 Start FAStT MSJ by double clicking the IBM NAS Admin icon 2 Under the NAS Management icon double click Storage then NAS Utilities 3 Select FASET MSJ 4 Once the FAStT MSJ opens e If you are connected locally with a monitor keyboard and mouse select localhost then click Connect If you are connected through Terminal Services enter the host name or IP address of the machine you are connected to through Terminal Services then click Connect For further details on FAStT MSJ see the online help provides detailed configuration information for a
146. data retention test CMem data retention test Hub online switchDisable ramTest portRegTest centralMemoryTest cmiTest camTest portLoopbackTest crossPortTest spinSilk sramRetentionTest cmemRetentionTest ma switchEnable Simultaneously press Ctrl C and Enter to quit continue view stats or log test results When you press Ctrl C and Enter you receive the message Diags Q uit C ontinue S tats L og e Enter Q to quit the diagnostic test Enter C to continue testing Enter S to view statistics e Enter L to save results for a list of the available offline and online tests See I for error message descriptions and the appropriate service actions Attention All offline diagnostics are disruptive to hub operations Before attempting these diagnostic tests or procedures make sure that the entire hub is available Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub 159 Diagnostic command descriptions camTest Verifies that the SID translation required by QuickLoop and implemented using content addressable memories CAM are functioning correctly centralMemoryTest Checks the central memory in each ASIC as follows e Built in self repair BISR circuit in each ASIC chip does not report failure to repair bad cells bisr test e Data cells can be uniquely written and read correctly data write read test e Data in any one ASIC can be read from any
147. del 326 engine shuts down as long as the AC power source is stable and the power supplies can provide 5V DC current This feature helps isolate the problem if an error causes the Model 326 engine to shut down Eigure shows the LEDs on the diagnostics panel on the system board You must remove the top cover to view the LEDS See for information on identifying problems using these LEDS DASD TEMP SP FAN REMIND Figure 2 Diagnostics panel LEDs Light path diagnostics os the light path diagnostics LEDs The system error LED is turned on when an error is detected If the system error LED an amber on the lower right corner is on remove the cover and check the diagnostic panel LEDs Aimee is valid only when the system error LED is on Notes 1 If a diagnostic panel LED is on and the information LED panel system error LED is off there is probably an LED problem Run LED diagnostics 2 Check the System Error Log for additional information before replacing a FRU 3 The DIMM error LEDs processor error LEDs and VRM error LEDs turn off when the system is powered off ep 88 Model 326 User s Reference Table 8 Descriptions of light path diagnostics LEDs Name Meaning PS1 Power supply 1 failure PS2 Power supply 2 failure PS3 Power supply 3 failure NON Non redundant power OVER The system has exceeded the power capabilities of the installed power suppli
148. diagnostics However you need to get an administrator username and password recognized by the hub from the system administrator After you get an administrator username stop any Ethernet session active on the Ethernet port Attach your service terminal to the serial port on the hub The Ethernet port and the serial port are mutually exclusive When prompted log in with the appropriate username and password The password does not display as you type it in The hub responds Username gt You can now type any diagnostic command and observe the results as they are logged to your service terminal Running diagnostics from a Telnet session on the Ethernet The easiest way to run diagnostics is through a LAN attached server that can access the hub Ethernet port You need to get an administrator level username and password from the system administrator as well as the hub IP address or name Perform the following steps ie Go to the server with LAN access and in an open window type telnet Ipaddress or name the hub IP address or name you were given by the system administrator Type the username you were given and press Enter The hub responds Ipaddress password Type the password you were given The hub responds Username gt You can now run any of the diagnostics and observe the results as the hub displays them in your Telnet session Diagnostic tests during POST able 29 lists the diagnostic tests that are automatically r
149. dows group name you specified or select one from the list of UNIX group names a 46 Model 326 User s Reference 8 Click Add to add the mapping between the UNIX group name and Windows group name to the list of maps 9 If multiple Windows group names are mapped to one UNIX group name select one Windows group name to be the primary group name Select the mapping corresponding to the primary group name from the list of maps and then click Set Primary 11 Click Apply Creating clustered file shares CIFS and NFS Note For HTTP and FTP clustering setup and file sharing refer to the information at the following URL The creation of file shares on a cluster involves dependencies on a physical disk a static IP address and a network name These dependencies allow resources that are defined to the same disk group to move as a group The dependencies also assure necessary access for the given resource Note You must configure Server for NFS before NFS file sharing can be used for details Figure il illustrates the file share dependencies Descriptions of the diagram components follow the figure File share Network i Virtual server name Physical disk IP Physical LAN connection Figure 1 File share dependencies Physical disk The base resource in which to store user data It is not dependent on any other resources except the physical disk that it defines The disk resource must also have the same drive l
150. dvanced users who want to customize the configuration of the FASET Host Adapter board and the connected devices using Fast UTIL to make changes O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 77 Enabling communication between system management adapters The two types of system management adapters are e The Integrated System Management Processor ISMP integrated on the planar board of each engine of the Model 326 Provides basic operational status about key engine components such as its processors power supplies fans and so on An optional Remote Supervisor Adapter RSA that can connect to up to twelve of the ISMPs Allows you to connect through a LAN or modem from virtually anywhere for extensive remote management The RSA works in conjunction with the ISMP of the Model 326 and an interconnect cable that connects multiple engines to the ISMP Remote connectivity and flexibility with LAN capability is provided by Ethernet connection Along with ANSI terminal Telnet and IBM Director the RSA enables more flexible management through a Web browser interface To use either adapter and for more information see Table 6 on page 79 provides a summary of the features of the ISMP and the RSA The light path diagnostics LED status that is available through the ISMP includes e Power supply failure e Insufficient power for power supply redundancy e Exceeded power supply capabilities e Non maskable interrupt occurred e Over heating e Fan failu
151. e IAACU Console The IAACU Console is a Java application that you install on one system in your network for use as a systems management console For information on how to install the JAACU Console see Hable 23 on page 128 Note The IAACU creates a private database that is specific to the IP subnetwork to which it is attached Therefore do not install it on more than one systems management console residing on the same IP subnetwork The IAACU Console enables you to e Automatically discover Model 326 appliances as well as other IBM appliances that run the IAACU agent and are attached to the same physical subnet as the IAACU Console e Use a GUI based application to configure the appliance network settings Use the IAACU to assign network parameters such as IP addresses DNS and gateway server addresses subnet masks and host names Group discovered appliances into function specific Families Appliances are added to a Family based on the appliance type Appliances that perform the same function appear in the same Family Start UM Services Web based systems management console Launch UM Services on your appliances and perform advanced systems management tasks on a selected appliance with a single mouse click The IAACU Console is divided into two panes e The Tree View Pane The Tree View Pane located on the left side of the IAACU Console window presents a list of all discovered Model 326 appliances and includes any Famil
152. e for example instructions for calculations to be performed conditions to be tested flow of control to be altered T expansion slot In personal computer systems one of several receptacles in the rear panel of the system unit into which a user can install an adapter extended configuration services Configuration services that reside outside a CP processor Extended configuration services keeps a local cache of transmission group locations Extended configuration services do not handle activation and deactivation See configuration services Extended Industry Standard Architecture EISA The PC bus standard that extends the AT bus ISA bus to 32 bits and provides busmastering It was announced in 1988 as a 32 bit alternative to the Micro Channel that would preserve investment in existing boards PC and AT cards ISA cards can plug into an EISA bus F failback The restoration of the appliance to its initial configuration after detection and repair of a failed network or appliance component failover 1 The automatic recovery of resources in the event of a network outage or failure of the hardware or software 2 A cluster event where the primary database server or application server switches over to a backup system due to the failure of the primary server failover group A type of virtual network interface It is a collection of physical and bonded interfaces that provide backup for each other Each member of the failover group mu
153. e using available addresses within the range defined in the Family rules When the IP address range for the Family has been exhausted the IAACU automatically searches for other Families that have rules matching the appliance being configured lf a matching Family with an available address is found the appliance will automatically be assigned to the Family that has available IP addresses This enables you to define multiple Families each of which uses a set of noncontiguous IP address ranges When an appliance is discovered on the network the IAACU automatically searches all previously defined Families starting with the first Family listed in the Families tree view and moving downward Appliances are automatically added to the first defined Family that matches the appliance purpose Therefore the order in which Families appear is important To adjust this search order right click a Family and then select Move Up or Move Down to adjust its position within the Families list e Orphaned Appliances Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools 17 Any discovered appliances that have been configured using the IAACU but that do not meet the rules for any existing Family are automatically added to the Orphaned Appliances group e Orphaned Externally Configured Appliances Any discovered appliance that has been configured without using the IAACU tool and that does not meet the rules for any existing Family is automatically added to the Orpha
154. e appears on All stations broadcasting is independent of all routes broadcasting the two can be done simultaneously or one at a time alternate adapter In a personal computer that is used on a LAN and that supports installation of two network adapters the adapter that uses alternate not standard or default mapping between adapter shared RAM adapter ROM and designated computer memory segments The alternate adapter is usually designated as adapter 1 in configuration parameters Contrast with primary adapter alternate memory mapping The mapping between adapter shared RAM adapter ROM and the designated computer memory segments for an alternate network adapter assigned disk A disk that is mapped to a logical drive asynchronous A class of data transmission service whereby all requests for service contend for a pool of dynamically allocated ring bandwidth and response time asynchronous data transfer A physical transfer of data to or from a device that occurs without a regular or predictable time relationship following execution of an I O request Contrast with synchronous data transfer asynchronous transfer mode ATM A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic ATM is specified in international standards such as ATM Forum UNI 3 1 asynchronous transmission A method of transmi
155. e controller power cords are plugged in and the power switches are on If applicable check that the main circuit breakers for the rack are turned on Check the main circuit breaker and AC outlet Power supply failure Replace the power supply Midplane failure Have the storage controller serviced Amber LED flashing 114 Model 326 User s Reference Drive CRUs Drive rebuild or identity is in process No corrective action is needed Table 21 Storage controller troubleshooting continued Problem indicator Component Possible cause Possible solutions One or more green LEDs off Power supply CRUs Power cord unplugged or switches turned off Make sure that the power cord is plugged in and the power supply switches are turned on All drive CRUs Midplane failure Have the midplane replaced service technician only Front panel Power supply Make sure that the cords problem are plugged in and power supplies are turned on Hardware failure If any other LEDs are on replace the midplane service technician only Battery Battery failure Replace the battery Cache active Host loop The cache is disabled the cache has failed battery failure Host managed hub or switch is off or has failed 1 Use the storage management software to enable the cache 2 Replace the RAID controller 3 Replace the battery Check if host managed hub
156. e for the session 4 In the Connect to window change to COM1 5 Set properties as follows Bits second 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None Then click OK 6 Connect and then press Enter on the terminal screen 7 Type qlshow 8 Write down the World Wide Name for example 10 00 00 60 69 30 18 00 9 Remove the cable from the first Fibre hub and connect it to the partner hub 10 Press Enter on the terminal screen 11 Type qlshow 12 Write down the World Wide Name for example 10 00 00 60 69 30 18 01 13 On this hub type including the quotes qlpartner 10 00 00 60 69 30 18 00 that is the first hub s WWN and press Enter 14 The hub saves the configuration and restarts 15 Connect the cable back to the first fibre hub 16 Press Enter on the terminal screen 17 On the first hub type including the quotes qlpartner 10 00 00 60 69 30 18 01 that is the partner hub s WWN and press Enter 18 After the hub restarts type qlshow to display the first hub and its partner peer Notes 1 When viewing the connection on the 3534 Fibre Managed Hubs you will see link lights on the interconnect fibre cable If using additional GBICs in the last port to partner the hubs then the qlshow command will not display a status for the qlpartnering Setting IP Address of Fibre Hub and Fibre Switch The following steps allow you to set an IP address for the Fibre hub and switch 1 91 R D Co
157. e monitor screen 3 When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears press F2 If a POST error is encountered a series of beeps sound and an error message appears on the monitor screen 4 Type in the appropriate password then press Enter If a system error is encountered the Configuration Setup screen appears Press Esc to start the Diagnostic program Note To run the diagnostic programs you must start the Model 326 with the highest level password that is set That is if an administrator password is set you must enter the administrator password not the power on password to run the diagnostic programs 5 Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the screen PC Doctor 2 0 with a copyright statement appears at the bottom of this screen 6 When the Diagnostic Programs screen appears select the test you want to run from the list that appears then follow the instructions on the screen Notes a Press F1 while running the diagnostic programs to obtain Help information Also press F1 from within a help screen to obtain online documentation from which you can select different categories To exit Help and return to where you left off press Esc b If the Model 326 engine stops during testing and you cannot continue restart the Model 326 engine and try running the diagnostic programs again c If you run the diagnostic programs with either no mouse or a USB mouse attached to your Model 326 engine you will not be able t
158. e node only During the setup of shared storage leave the joining node powered off To configure the storage use the IBM FAStT Storage Manager Storage Manager With Storage Manager you can configure and manage the DASD mounted in the IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller and IBM 5192 Network Attached Storage Storage Unit Model ORU storage unit enclosures Storage Manager provides a GUI for managing storage subsystems It features two main windows Enterprise Management Use this window to add remove and monitor the storage subsystem within the management domain Subsystem Management Use this window to manage individual storage subsystem components You manage the storage subsystems through the Fibre Channel I O path between the engines and the RAID controllers host agent method The Storage Manager software is installed on both engines allowing you to manage the storage subsystems from a Terminal Services session open on either node s engine Direct managed method for managing the 5191 RAID Storage Controller The Storage Manager Application provides two methods for managing storage subsystems the host agent managed method and the direct managed method The Model 326 comes preconfigured with me DOSE agent management method as described in You can use the direct managed method when an se REE path is required for example during a failure of the host agent management path O Copyright IBM Corp
159. e receiving power The cable connection between them is good A 100 Mbps link has been established Amber The adapter and switch are receiving power The cable connection between them is good A 10 Mbps link has been established ACT Off The adapter is not sending or receiving network data Flashing amber The adapter is sending or receiving network data Testing the Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter The event log tells you when you should run diagnostics You can view the event log from the Event Viewer located in the Administrative Tools folder on the Start Menu located under Programs When the event log reports that SLICx has determined that the adapter is not functioning properly run diagnostics on the Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter using the following procedure 1 3 Run the SLICuser application from the Start Menu located under the Program Files folder in the Alacritech Folder Select the Diagnostics tab Note Running diagnostics disrupts all ports of the adapter Click Run The adapter will then run through a self test of the Internet Protocol Processor IPP and the selected port of the adapter A properly functioning board will display a window in which all of its tests have Passed Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 101 4 Click OK to close the SLICuser utility Troubleshooting the PRO 1000 XT Server adapter Use the troubleshooting chart in Table 13 to find so
160. e the adapter and adapter support code if used for use by an application program inoperative The condition of a resource that has been active but is no longer active The resource could have failed or could have been suspended while a reactivate command was being processed interference 1 The prevention of clear reception of broadcast signals 2 The distorted portion of a received signal 3 In optics the interaction of two or more beams of coherent or partially coherent light Internet Engineering Task Force IETF The task force of the Internet Architecture Board IAB that is responsible for solving the short term engineering needs of the Internet The IETF consists of numerous working groups each focused on a particular problem Internet standards are typically developed or reviewed by individual working groups before they can become standards Internet Protocol IP A protocol that routes data through a network or interconnected networks IP acts as an intermediary between the higher protocol layers and the physical network Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX The routing protocol used to connect Novell s servers or any workstation or router that implements IPX with other workstations Although similar to TCP IP it uses different packet formats and terminology interrupt level The means of identifying the source of an interrupt the function requested by an interrupt or the code or feature that provides a function or service
161. e usage is above the warning threshold PSM prohibits any attempt to create a new persistent image and logs error messages to the system log and alert log The text of the error message that is logged in the system event log from psman5 is A persistent image could not be created due to error 0xe000102b When the cache file usage exceeds the automatic deletion threshold also configured in the PSM Volumes panel for the drive the default value is 90 percent PSM automatically selects a persistent image on the volume and deletes it to reduce the cache file usage It selects ihe persistent image with the lowest retention value as described in more than one persistent image has the same iene retention value then the oldest image will be selected for deletion If this deletion does not reduce the cache file usage below the automatic deletion threshold then it will continue to select and delete persistent images until the cache file usage is reduced below the automatic deletion threshold For each deletion PSM generates an error message to the system event log and to the Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage alert log indicating that a persistent image was deleted You should periodically check the system event log or Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage alert log to ensure that the cache file usage is not consistently high forcing existing persistent images to be deleted and preventing new persistent images from being create
162. ect two or more branches T standby hot spare disk A physical disk that is automatically mapped to a logical drive when no suitable hot spare disk is available storage area network SAN A dedicated storage network tailored to a specific environment combining servers storage products networking products software and services 216 Model 326 Users Reference storage controller A device such as a RAID Controller that creates and manages other storage devices storage device A LUN that terminates a collection of ports on the storage network storage network Provides shared access to a set of LUNs across one to n storage client networks storage network device A type of hub switch director or router on the Fibre Channel fabric that is directly connected to the storage client network A storage network device is part of the fabric infrastructure but does not directly provide LUNs storage client network A classic interconnected Fibre Channel fabric with a single Fibre Channel fabric name storage port A NAS 300 engine s connection point to a storage client network A storage port is a member of a single fabric storage unit Hardware that contains one or more drive bays power supplies and network interface Some storage units contain RAID controllers their storage unit is accessed by the appliance store and forward A mode of operation for a LAN switch in which it completely checks every frame before forwarding so custome
163. ectory name Contents IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration console and agent installation files The IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration agent is preinstalled as a Windows Powered service on the Model 326 To install the Advanced Appliance Configuration console on another network attached workstation running Windows 98 Windows NT or Windows 2000 run Ipsetup exe if you have Supplementary CD Version 1 6 or setup bat if you have Supplementary CD Version 1 0 from the xWBM Advanced Appliance Configuration directory where x is the drive letter assigned to your workstation CD ROM drive Note When the installation completes it will leave behind a temporary directory named iaacu on the workstation under the directory specified by the TEMP environment variable usually c temp you can determine the value of the TEMP variable by typing set temp from a DOS command prompt Remove this directory using Windows Explorer after the installation has completed Disklmages Contains diskette image for the Recovery Enablement Diskette To create the Recovery Enablement Diskette run RecovDsk bat and insert a HD 1 44 floppy diskette into drive A when prompted Be sure to read the readme txt file located in this directory for last minute and model specific updates 1386 Windows Powered installation files If you add device drivers OS features and so on you might be prompted to insert the Windows
164. ed in the Orphaned Appliances group Inthe Orphaned Externally Configured Appliances group Appliances that are running the IAACU agent but that have a network configuration that was not set by the IAACU agent or console will appear in the Orphaned Externally Configured Appliances group If an appliance is contained in the Orphaned Externally Configured Appliances group you can 16 Model 326 User s Reference Using Families and Groups in the Tree View Families are important elements of the IAACU They specify the parameters that the IAACU uses to automatically categorize discovered appliances and to configure them with the appropriate network settings Family rules are defined solely by appliance type or purpose Each Family can contain only one type of appliance The only way to automatically apply predetermined network settings to newly installed and discovered appliances is to create and use Families Appliances that match the rules criteria for a Family group can be automatically configured to use predefined network settings A Family can be configured to allow appliances to use DHCP to configure their IP settings or can be defined to automatically assign IP settings such as primary gateway and DNS server addresses assigning an IP address from a specified IP address range and specifying a subnet mask Host names for discovered appliances can also be defined so that they are allocated using either a prefix or appliance serial numb
165. ed owner will fail back to that node and return to an online state Recovering from a corrupted Quorum drive Clustering relies on data stored on the Quorum disk to maintain resource synchronization between the two nodes in the cluster In the event of a power loss to both nodes or a hardware failure that corrupts the Quorum data the cluster service might not start leading to the following event log error Event 1D 1147 Source ClusSvc Description The Microsoft Clustering Service encountered a fatal error The Quorum drive data must be available so the cluster service can confirm that the cluster configuration on the local node is up to date If it cannot read the log the cluster service does not start to prevent the loading of old configuration data To restore the Quorum disk a Microsoft Windows Backup utility backup of the System State of the boot drive C of one node must be available Backing up the entire boot drive also saves the System State Backing up the System State automatically saves the Quorum log and other cluster files A Microsoft tool is needed as part of the Quorum restore procedure This tool is called Clusrest exe and can be downloaded from the Microsoft Web site at the following URL The Quorum restore procedure involves restoring the system state and cluster state to the node followed by execution of the Clusrest exe tool Upon completion of the restore the node should rejoin the cluster and return to nor
166. el 326 engine is on shut down your operating system and restart the engine 3 When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears press F2 If a power on password or administrator password is set you will be prompted for it Type in the appropriate password then press Enter 4 When the Diagnostic Programs screen appears select Utility from the top of the screen 5 Select View Test Log from the list that appears then follow the instructions on the screen The system maintains the test log data while the Model 326 is powered on When you turn off the power to the Model 326 the test log is cleared Diagnostic error message tables Table 28 describes the error messages that might appear when you run the diagnostic programs Important If diagnostic error messages that are not listed in able 28l appear make sure that your appliance has the latest levels of BIOS Advanced System Management Processor and diagnostics microcode In the following error codes if XXX is 000 195 or 197 do not replace a part These error codes have the following meanings 000 The test passed 195 Esc was pressed to end the test 197 This is a warning error and might not indicate a hardware failure For all other error codes replace the part or perform the actions indicated Table 28 Diagnostic error messages Error Code Meaning FRU action 001 XXX 000 Failed core tests System board 001 XXX 001 Failed core tests System board 0
167. ement window for the selected storage subsystem Note Using the open Subsystem Management window you can manage only the selected storage subsystem However you can open multiple Subsystem Management windows to manage other storage subsystems Changing storage subsystem host type Changing the host type modifies settings on the 5191 RAID Storage Controller to support the operating system and environment Use the open Subsystem Management window to change this setting 1 Select Storage Subsystem gt Change gt Default Host Type 2 From the New Host type drop down menu select Windows 2000 Clustered then select OK 3 Continue with Renaming storage subsystems When you start Storage Manager for the first time the storage subsystems are unnamed To rename them use the Subsystem Management window Refer to the renaming storage subsystems topic in the Subsystem Management online help The help topic provides detailed instructions for renaming storage subsystems As a security precaution it is recommended that you protect the storage subsystems with a password Creating arrays and logical drives To create an array or logical drive perform the following procedure 1 Highlight a storage subsystem in the Enterprise Management window and select Tools gt Manage Device 2 Select Configure gt Create Array Logical Drive to create all of your planned arrays and logical drives on this storage subsystem 3 Repeat the arrays l
168. en field type with quotation marks x Terminal Services Client Disk 1 setup exe where x is the drive letter assigned to the CD ROM drive Click OK to begin the Terminal Services Client Setup program Accept the defaults in each window that opens or refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation for more instructions When the Terminal Services Client Setup program completes ensure that the workstation has network connectivity to the NAS appliance so that you can administer the appliance Connecting to the desktop through Terminal Services To connect to Terminal Services from your workstation do the following 1 2 Click Start gt Programs gt Terminal Services gt Terminal Services Client In the Server field select the computer name of the appropriate Model 326 If that Model 326 is not listed enter the IP address or the computer name of the Model 326 The computer name is predefined as IBM5195 xxxxxxx where xxxxxxx is the serial number located in the lower right corner of the bezel on the front of the appliance If you have changed the computer name from the predefined value use that name instead Note Although you can do so it is recommended that you not change the default computer name to avoid the chance of propagating misidentification through the system And if you are using IBM Director to manage your appliance and you change the default name the default name continues to appear in IBM Director For Size se
169. ent states A Contrast with bits per second 2 In asynchronous transmission the unit of modulation rate corresponding to one unit interval per second that is if the duration of the unit interval is 20 milliseconds the modulation rate is 50 baud BIOS See Basic Input Output System bit time 1 The time required to transmit 1 bit on the network For example the IBM PC Network bit time equals 500 nanoseconds ns 2 The reciprocal of the line data rate or network data transfer rate bits per second bps The rate at which bits are transmitted per second Contrast with baud block delay time The time delay permitted for received frames to be assembled into blocks for retransmission bond group A logical collection of two or more physical ports on a per engine basis only that becomes one interface on the network You can create two kinds of bond groups in the NAS appliance aggregated links see link aggregration and active backup bonded interface See bond group bonding The act of combining two or more physical ports to create one logical network interface with one associated IP address Bonding can improve performance by either increasing bandwidth see link aggregation or providing port backup see active backup bootstrap 1 A sequence of instructions whose execution causes additional instructions to be loaded and executed until the complete computer program is in storage T 2 A technique or device designed to bring
170. er The IAACU is not the only way to configure network settings For example network settings can be configured using Terminal Services for Windows or by attaching a keyboard and mouse to the appliance and using Windows Control Panel If the appliance network settings have been configured by a method other than using the IAACU the appliance will be discovered by the IAACU and it will be added to an appropriate Family if one exists Appliances that have been configured using a method other than the IAACU for which no appropriate family exists will appear in the Orphaned Externally Configured Appliances group The Tree View Panel contains the following items All Appliances Every discovered appliance is listed in the tree view under All Appliances e Families The Families group in the Tree View Pane shows all Families that have been defined with appliances that have already been assigned to each Family nested beneath the Family name in the tree view Families are defined by appliance purpose so all appliances that appear in a given family are of the same type If you select a Family from the Tree View Pane a description of the Family and the rules that are used to define the selected Family appear in the Information Pane If you select an appliance from a Family in the Tree View Pane the selected appliance network settings appear in the Information Pane If you are not using DHCP the IAACU automatically assigns one IP address per applianc
171. er Read Transfer Ready Enabled or Disabled Disabled Response Timer 0 255 0 Interrupt Delay Timer 0 255 0 Extended Control Block Enables all other extended firmware settings The default is Enabled RIO Operation Mode Specifies the reduced interrupt operation RIO modes if supported by the software driver RIO modes allow posting multiple command completions in a single interrupt see The default is O Table 36 RIO operation modes Option Operation mode 0 No multiple responses 1 Multiple responses 16 bit handles interrupt host Multiple responses 32 bit handles interrupt host Multiple responses 16 bit handles delay host interrupt AJOJN Multiple responses 32 bit handles delay host interrupt Connection Options Defines the type of connection loop or point to point or connection preference see The default is 3 Table 37 Connection options Option Type of connection 0 Loop only 1 Point to point only 174 Model 326 User s Reference Table 37 Connection options continued 2 Loop preferred otherwise point to point 3 Point to point otherwise loop Class 2 Service Enables Class 2 service parameters to be provided during all automatic logins loop ports The default is Disabled ACKO Determines the type of acknowledge ACK used When this setting is enabled sequence ACK is used When this setting is disabled frame ACK i
172. er 3 Getting started 27 enabled right click the adapter icon to enable it After the initial setup you can then enable all other NIC interfaces installed You must modify the adapter by completing the IP task to modify IP configurations and then choosing one or more of the following tasks as appropriate DNS to modify DNS configurations e WINS to modify WINS configurations e HOSTS to modify host configurations 28 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 4 Setting up storage This chapter gives details for setting up and configuring the Model 326 storage The Model 326 has a preconfigured shared storage RAID configuration on the first IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller The storage is formatted as an array at RAID level 5 consisting of the following LUNs e ALUN of 500 MB for the Quorum drive drive letter G The Quorum drive is used by Microsoft Cluster Service to manage clustered resources 3 ge 50 in the event of a power loss to both nodes ora a hardware failure that corrupts Quorum data e A second LUN composed of the remaining space and used as a shared drive with one built in hot spare You can use this preconfigured storage or delete it and configure new storage If the preconfigured storage meets your requirements you can proceed with page 371 If you delete it you uer complete the steps in this fe Note When you set up the shared storage with Storage Manager you must configure the storage on on
173. eration close the Enterprise Management window When the initial automatic discovery is complete you can see all hosts and storage subsystems attached to the local subnetwork If you do not see all hosts and storage subsystems perform these steps a Check the hardware and connections for possible problems refer to the hardware documentation for specific procedures b Refer to the Enterprise Management online help topic about discovering storage subsystems If any device has a status of Unresponsive use the software to remove the device from the management domain and then add it again Refer to the Enterprise Management online help for instructions on removing and adding devices If the storage subsystem is managed directly but is attached to a host with the host agent software installed and running the storage subsystem might be duplicated in the device tree after an automatic discovery In this case you can remove the duplicate storage management icon from the device tree using the remove device option in the Enterprise Management window Chapter 4 Setting up storage 31 Starting Subsystem Management The Subsystem Management window enables you to manage selected subsystems Use the following procedure to open a Subsystem Management window for a selected storage subsystem 1 In the Enterprise Management window select a storage subsystem 2 Select Tools gt Manage Device The software displays the Subsystem Manag
174. ersal serial bus USB A serial interface standard for telephony and multimedia connections to personal computers unshielded twisted pair UTP A cable medium with one or more pairs of twisted insulated copper conductors bound in a single plastic sheath USB See universal serial bus V VLAN See virtual local area network VLU Volume logical unit VLUN See virtual logical unit virtual connection A connection set up between two points that appears to the user to be available as a dedicated connection This phantom connection can be maintained indefinitely or can be ended at will The three states of a virtual connection are up down or suspended virtual local area network VLAN A logical association of switch ports based upon a set of rules or criteria such as MAC addresses protocols network address or multicast address This permits resegmentation of the LAN without requiring physical rearrangement virtual logical unit VLUN A subset of a logical drive virtual port Logical construct that corresponds to a logical adapter for a switched network port A virtual port organizes outgoing switched logical links by specifying incoming call acceptance criteria by dynamically building and relating logical adapters with selected hardware adapter ports and by specifying adapter related data link control DLC profiles for use with those logical adapters VNI Virtual network interface volume 1 Unit of storage on disk tape
175. ersonnel to diagnose hardware problems direct access storage device DASD A mass storage medium on which a computer stores data Contrast with random access memory RAM Direct Memory Access DMA A technique in which an adapter bypasses a computer s CPU and handles the transfer of data between itself and the system s memory directly distributed data processing DDP Synonym for distributed processing DLR See dynamic link routine DMA See Direct Memory Access DNS See domain name system Domain Name System DNS In the Internet suite of protocols the distributed database system used to map domain names to IP addresses drive bay A receptacle into which you insert a disk drive module in an appliance The bays are in storage units that can be physically located in a separate rack from the appliance dual inline memory module DIMM A small circuit board with memory integrated circuits containing signal and power pins on both sides of the board Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP A protocol defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF that is used for dynamically assigning IP addresses to computers in a network dynamic link routine DLR A program or routine that can be loaded by an application or as part of a program E EIA See Electronic Industries Association EISA See Extended Industry Standard Architecture ELAN See emulated LAN electromagnetic interference A disturbance in the transmissi
176. ervices Client to connect to or configure the Model 326 This notice applies only to the first time the Model 326 node is started after using the Recovery CD Set e Logical Disk O will be configured to have a 6 GB NTFS boot partition Any other previously configured logical disk drives as well as the remainder of Logical Disk O which on the original hard disk drive of the node contains the Maintenance partition but for a replacement hard disk drive would not contain any other partitions are unchanged 11 Reinstall any software updates that are newer than those on the Recovery CD Set 124 Model 326 Users Reference 12 If you are using the recovery procedure to restore the failed node after replacing the internal hard disk drive continue with this step Otherwise go to Step 13 You must now rebuild the Maintenance D partition on the new hard disk drive as the recovery process only rebuilds the System C partition a Start Disk Management on the failed node You can do this in one of two ways e Start a Terminal Services session to the node then click the IBM NAS Admin icon and then from the IBM NAS Administration console that appears select Computer Management then Disk Management e Start a Windows 2000 for NAS user interface session to the node then select Disks and Volumes then select Disks and Volumes again and then provide your administrator user name and password when prompted b In the Disk Manageme
177. es NMI Non maskable interrupt occurred TEMP System temperature exceeded maximum rating FAN A fan failed or is operating slowly MEM Memory failure One or more memory DIMMs have failed CPU Microprocessor failure One or both microprocessors have failed PCIA Error on PCI channel A or system board Note PCI bus A is often referred to as PCI bus 0 PCI B Error on PCI channel B or system board Note PCI bus B is often referred to as PCI bus 1 PCI C Error on PCI channel C or system board Note PCI bus C is often referred to as PCI bus 2 VRM Error on voltage regulator module or on integrated voltage regulator DASD A hot swap disk drive backplane or other part of SCSI channel A has failed SP Integrated System Management Processor detected an error Remind button You can use the remind button to place the front panel system error light into a remind mode By pressing the button you acknowledge the failure but indicate that you will not take immediate action If a new error occurs the LED will be on again In the remind mode the system error LED flashes every 2 seconds The system error LED remains in remind mode until one of the following situations occurs All known problems are resolved e The system is restarted A new problem occurs You can use the remind button to delay maintenance Also resetting the system error LED enables the LED to react to another error If the LED is still blinking
178. es are available during the warranty period e Problem determination Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem IBM hardware repair If the problem is determined to be caused by IBM hardware under warranty trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service e Engineering change management Occasionally there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold IBM or your reseller if authorized by IBM will make Engineering Changes ECs available that apply to your hardware Be sure to retain your proof of purchase to obtain warranty service Please have the following information ready when you call e Machine type and model e Serial numbers of your IBM hardware products e Description of the problem e Exact wording of any error messages e Hardware and software configuration information Copyright IBM Corp 2002 129 If possible be at your NAS device when you call A compatible monitor keyboard and mouse are required for many service activities Before you have the NAS device serviced be sure to attach these components to the device either directly or indirectly through a console switch The following items are not covered e Replacement or use of non IBM parts or nonwarranted IBM parts Note All warranted parts contain a 7 character identification in the format IB
179. essor 1 Ensure that all processors are the same stepping level 2 and cache size 2 Processor 2 01298101 Bad update data for 1 Ensure that all processors are the same stepping level processor 1 and cache size 2 Processor 1 01298102 Bad update data for 1 Ensure that all processors are the same stepping level processor 2 and cache size 2 Processor 2 19990301 Fixed boot sector error 1 Hard disk drive 2 SCSI backplane 3 Cable 4 System board 19990305 Fixed boot sector error no Install the operating system to the hard disk drive operating system installed 19990650 AC power has been restored 1 Check power cable 2 Check for interruption of power supply Event error logs The POST error log contains the three most recent error codes and messages that the system generated during POST The System Event Error Log contains all error messages issued during POST and all system status messages from the Advanced System Management Processor In event of a POST error check the System Event Error Log as it may indicate the most recent errors commonly associated with typical hardware failures It may not detect all hardware failures but many times will provide an indicator as to the nature of key failures To view the contents of the error logs start the Configuration Setup Utility program then select Event Error Logs from the main menu Diagnostic program messages The appliance diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read
180. et adapter i Troubleshooting the PRO 1000 XT Server adapter Troubleshooting the ServeRAID 4Lx Troubleshooting the SCSI HVD 3570 adapter Testing the Fibre Channel host adapter with FAStT MSJ Testing the Integrated System Management Processor Testing the Remote Supervisor Adapter Testing SCSI adapters IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU Hub diagnostics IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller Replacing hot swap drives is IBM 5192 Storage Unit Model ORU storage unit Chapter 9 Using the Recovery and Supplementary CDs Using the Recovery Enablement Diskette and Recovery CD Using the Supplementary CD Appendix A Notices Trademarks Appendix B Getting help service and information Service support ME Before you call for service f Getting customer support and service Getting help online www ibm com storage support Getting help by telephone a tie Ga cat Appendix C Purchasing additional services Warranty and repair services i Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages Power on self test POST at we oe pa ere POST beep code descriptions Contents 123 125 127 128 129 129 130 130 130 131 133 133 135 135 135 V vi POST beep codes POST error messages Event error logs Diagnostic program messages Text messages Starting the diagnostic programs Viewing the test log
181. ete settings to a directory named Director save where shows the number of backups for example the third backup of the server will be saved in directory Director save 3 You must stop the IBM Director Management Server service to execute this command The command supports the following options twgsave s where the optional parameter s specifies that software distribution packages not be saved This helps reduce the size of the backup files twgrestore This command restores the saved data from an IBM Director Management Server Do not attempt to use this restore feature to replicate an IBM Director Server The command supports the following options twgrestore t directory where the optional parameter t specifies that the data is restored but server ID and system name is not restored and directory is where the saved data resides IBM Director Management Server cannot be running when this command is issued twgreset This command resets the Director Server system to the status after installing You can use it if you want to clear all tables in the database and erase the system ID files This command can be helpful to make sure that after a restore only the data from the saved directory will be in the Director System The command supports the following options twgreset d i Where d means to clear the tables in the database and i means to erase the unique identification files for the system You can save and restore data only
182. etters on both nodes so that the definitions of resources that depend on it do not change if the resource is moved to the other node Static IP address A virtual address that binds onto an existing IP address on one of the clusters public networks This IP address provides access for clients and is not dependent on a particular node instead a subnet that both nodes can access Because this address is not the physical adapters permanent address it can bind and unbind to its paired adapter on the same network on the other node in the cluster You can create multiple IP addresses using the Cluster Administrator on the same physical network Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup 47 Note Note that the cluster IP Address should not be used for file shares That address is reserved to connect to and manage the cluster through the network that it is defined on Network name An alternate computer name for an existing named computer It is physically dependent on an IP address on one of the public networks When a disk group contains an IP address resource and a network name it is a virtual server and provides identity to the group which is not associated with a specific node and can be failed over to another node in the cluster Users access the groups using this virtual server In the creation of a basic file share that is publicized to the network under a single name you must set it up to be dependent on the p
183. expansion units ServeRAID Manager RAID Configuration and Monitoring Provides configuration tools and RAID management of the ServeRAID 4Lx adapter IBM FAStT Management Suite Java MSJ Provides diagnostics for the Fibre Channel adapters Intel PROSet II Provides diagnostics for the Intel Ethernet adapters Alacritech SLICuser Provides diagnostics for the quad port Ethernet adapter Columbia Data Products Persistent Storage Manager PSM Provides 250 persistent images of customer data and enables full online backup of system with Microsoft s backup applications Tivoli Storage Manager Client Provides data backup and archive support in conjunction with Tivoli Storage Manager Server 2 Model 326 User s Reference Roadmap for setting up and configuring the Model 326 m A suggestion for first time users Your understanding of the Model 326 and your ability to use it will be greatly enhanced if you first proceed to the NAS Setup Navigator tutorial The NAS Setup Navigator is a distillation of the tasks you will need to complete to set up and configure the Model 326 and get it up and running The Navigator not only presents information on functions and features such as clustering but also allows you to enable the functions and features After you have become familiar with the Model 326 you can refer to this book for more details The following roadmap presents the requirements and instructions for setting
184. faces there can be more than one load balancing engine per set of engines Each load balancing engine acts as an active backup for another load balancing engine within that set Alternatively there can be only one active load balancing engine per set of engines and one passive backup standby load balancing engine actual data transfer rate The average number of bits characters or blocks per unit of time transferred from a data source and received by a data sink adapter address The hexadecimal digits that identify an adapter adaptive cut through switching A mode of operation for LAN switches in which they will automatically alternate between cut through switching and store and forward switching depending on user configurable per port error rate thresholds advertise To pass routing reachability information along from one router to another all routes broadcast frame A frame that has bits in the routing information field set to indicate that the frame is to be sent to all LAN segments in the network across all bridges even if multiple paths allow multiple copies of the frame to arrive at some LAN segments The destination address is not examined and plays no role in bridge routing all stations broadcast frame A frame whose destination address bits are set to all ones All stations on any LAN segment on which the frame appears will copy it The routing information not the destination address determines which LAN segments the fram
185. from the first error it will mask additional errors Engine troubleshooting charts You can use symptoms If you cannot find the problem in the table go to arting the diagno program TET to test the Model 326 engine If you have already run the diagnostic test programs or if running the tests does not reveal the problem call for service Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 89 The symptom appears in the left column of the table Instructions and probable solutions to the problem are in the right column If you have just added new software or a new option and the Model 326 engine is not working do the following before using the troubleshooting charts 1 Remove the software or device that you just added 2 Run the diagnostic tests to determine if the Model 326 engine is running correctly 3 Reinstall the new software or new device Table 9 Engine troubleshooting symptoms and actions Error Symptom CRU action CD is not working correctly on gt Clean the CD Run CD ROM diagnostic CD ROM drive CD ROM drive tray is not working PWN Ensure the appliance is powered ON Insert the end of a paper clip into the manual tray release opening Run CD ROM diagnostic CD ROM drive CD ROM drive is not recognized Ox DUE Ns o Run Configuration Setup enable primary IDE channel Check cables and jumpers Check for correct device driver System board Run CD ROM diagnostics CD ROM drive
186. g a test or procedure Isolating a system fault Various loopback paths are built into the hub hardware for diagnostic purposes loopback path test within the hub verifies the proper internal Fibre Channel port logic functions and the paths between the interfaces and central memory Diagnostics also supports external loops that include the system board and the GBIC module in cross port configurations These port to port diagnostics allow you to check installed fiber cables and perform port fault isolation Removing power After all data transferring processes external to the hub are completed removing power from the hub does not disrupt the fabric Note Error messages are stored in random access memory RAM and are lost when power is removed from the hub Access the error message log to view and note any error messages before removing power from the hub Service actions for error messages See or messages on page 165 for error message descriptions and the appropriate service actions Setting up partnering with the 3534 Fibre managed hubs The following steps allow you to re partner the 3534 Fibre managed hubs Note Partnering of the hubs is set up on the product before it is shipped to you O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 155 Connect a serial cable that shipped with the hub not null modem between the serial port on the hub and COM1 of the system 2 Open a HyperTerminal Session from the managing system 3 Choose a nam
187. g and Two Short Beeps 1 Video adapter if present 2 System board Two Long and Two Short Beeps Video adapter Table 26 POST no beep codes No Beep Symptom FRU action No sor and ar system 1 Check speaker cables operates correctly 5 Speaker 3 System board No Beeps occur after successfully completing POST The Power On Run Configuration Setup set the Start Options Power On Status to enable Status is disabled 2 Check speaker connections 3 System board No AC power Power 1 Check the power cord Supply AC RED 18 01 2 Power supply if two are installed swap them to determine if one is defective 3 Power backplane 4 Hot swap power AC inlet box No beep and no video See the Hardware Installation Guide System will not power up Power supply AC LED is on See the Hardware Installation Guide Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 139 POST error messages Table 27 provides information about the POST error messages that can appear during startup Note that these diagnostic error messages require the attachment of a monitor keyboard and mouse before you power on the system to enable you to see them In the following error messages X can be any number or letter Table 27 POST error messages Error Meaning FRU action code Symptom 062 Three consecutive boot 1 Run Configurati
188. g transferred on a port the LED flickers fast green showing the port is active and transferring data After the POST diagnostics are run the hub power on ready LED indicates that the system board diagnostics have completed successfully Hub diagnostics The 3534 hub is designed for maintenance free operation If you suspect a failure use the self diagnostic capabilities of the hub to help isolate any equipment or Fibre Channel FC loop failures The hub supports POSTs and diagnostic tests Verifying power on self test POST lists the diagnostic tests that automatically run during a POST Table 19 Hub POST tests Test Description Memory test Checks the CPU RAM memory Port register test Checks the ASIC registers and SRAMs Central memory test Checks the system board SRAMs CMI Conn test Checks the CMI bus between ASICs CAM test Checks the CAM Port loopback test Checks all of the hub hardware to ensure the frames are transmitted looped back and received After the hub completes the POST the indicator returns to a steady state from the blinking states shown during the tests If a yellow indicator light is displayed this indicates that the port failed one of the POSTS If error conditions are encountered they can be displayed through Telnet after the hub completes the POST The hub ready LED can be used to verify successful POST approximately 2 minutes after power on Running diagnos
189. ge 29 creating Quorum arrays and LUNs 32 starting Enterprise Management 31 starting Subsystem Management 32 IBM FAStT Storage Manager for Windows 2000 2 IBM NAS Administration console 13 identifying problems using LEDs 86 initial setup and configuration 26 installing Terminal Services 12 integrated Ethernet adapter troubleshooting 96 Integrated System Management Processor ISMP 78 109 Intel adapters and adapter teaming 81 Intel PROSet II 2 testing Ethernet adapters with 99 interconnect private network adapter configuring 37 intermittent problem locating 120 Interrupt Status Port Register ISPR Error Procedures 105 ISMP Integrated System Management Processor 78 109 ISMP and RSA comparison of 79 using 80 ISMP to RSA communication on a single machine enabling 80 ISPR Interrupt Status Port Register Error Procedures 105 K keyboard monitor and mouse using for setup and configuration 9 L LEDs diagnosing problems using 86 diagnostics panel 88 power supply 86 light path diagnostics 88 log event error 145 logical drives formatting 35 LUN expansion commands for 33 DiskPart 33 overview 33 M maintenance partition rebuilding 67 managing Fibre Channel host bus adapters 77 managing the appliance 9 memory notes 84 messages diagnostic programs 145 148 POST 140 methods for setting up the Model 326 25 Microsoft Cluster Service 2 Microsoft Services for UNIX 2 Microsoft Services for UNIX and NFS Support 72 Mic
190. gn letter 1 or mount path convert list 34 Model 326 User s Reference You can use several commands to convert disks The format and options for each of the commands are convert mbr convert gpt convert dynamic convert basic convert mbr sets the partitioning style of the current disk to master boot record MBR The disk can be a basic disk or a dynamic disk but the disk must not contain any valid data partitions or volumes convert gpt sets the partitioning style of the current disk to GPT The disk may be a basic or a dynamic disk but it must not contain any valid data partitions or volumes This command is valid only on Itanium based computers it can be unsuccessful on x 86 based computers convert dynamic changes a basic disk into a dynamic disk The disk can contain valid data partitions convert basic changes an empty dynamic disk to basic You can use several commands to display summaries of disk configuration The format for each of the commands is list disk list partition list volume list disk displays summary information about each disk in the computer The disk with the asterisk has the current focus Only fixed disks for example IDE or SCSI or removable disks for example 1394 or USB are listed The removable drives are not displayed list partition displays information about each partition on the in focus disk list volume displays information about each volume in the computer Formatt
191. groups to access the Model 326 storage through the Network File System NFS protocol O 2 has more information O e e O on Services for UNIX and NFS Support for NFS is provided in the Model 326 by a preloaded and preconfigured software component Microsoft Services for UNIX The levels of NFS supported by Services for UNIX and in turn the Model 326 are NFS Versions 2 and 3 Any client or server that is using an NFS software stack supporting NFS Version 2 or NFS Version 3 regardless of the operating system can connect to the Model 326 and access its storage through NFS You administer NFS file shares and other attributes with standard Windows administration tools including those provided as part of the IBM NAS desktop and the Microsoft Windows 2000 for NAS user interface Additional configuration of the User Name Mapping component of Services for UNIX which maps the UNIX user name space to the Windows user name space is required to support NFS security You can define a local UNIX name space on the Model 326 by configuring the Server for PCNFS component of Services for UNIX Alternately you can point Services for UNIX to an existing Network Information Service NIS domain that defines the UNIX name space In both cases you must configure the User Name Mapping component to map the UNIX name space that you select to the Windows name space because file shares and individual file and directory permissions on the Model 326 are defined
192. h 108 Fibre Channel connectivity checking 109 Fibre Channel host adapter testing with FAStT MSJ 108 Fibre Channel host bus adapters managing 77 formatting logical drives 35 G Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter troubleshooting 100 H help online 23 130 telephone 131 hot swap drives replacing 116 IAACU IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility 11 13 25 IAACU Agent 15 IAACU Console 15 IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU hub diagnostics 155 POST 158 setup procedure 155 IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU troubleshooting 111 IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ engine 85 troubleshooting 85 222 Model 326 User s Reference IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU 83 IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller troubleshooting 113 IBM 5192 Storage Unit Model ORU storage unit troubleshooting 118 IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility IAACU 11 13 25 IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility agent 2 IBM Director dependencies 54 disaster recovery 56 dynamic NAS groups 58 Electronic Service Agent eSA 58 extensions 55 hardware requirements 54 naming conventions 55 NAS Web Ul task 58 overview 53 Predictive Failure Analysis 59 rack manager and inventory enhancements 57 real time diagnostics 57 software distribution 56 Web based access 55 IBM Director Agent 2 IBM FAStT Storage Manager Storage Manager 29 alternative method for managing 5191 RAID Storage Controller stora
193. hanging 12 13 55 configuration and administration tools 9 configuring interconnect private network adapter 37 configuring the appliance 9 configuring the public local area connection 38 creating arrays 32 clustered file shares CIFS and NFS 47 logical drives 32 PSM recovery diskette 65 users 43 Customer Replaceable Unit CRU list 177 D date and time setting 27 default password 27 default user name 27 defining UNIX users and groups 43 determining who is using network attached storage 13 diagnostic commands 159 diagnostic programs description 145 error messages 148 diagnostic tools 85 diagnostics 3534 hub 112 adapters 96 IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU hub 155 diagnostics panel 88 disaster recovery 64 discovery of appliances 16 domain joining a node to 40 221 E enabling communication between system management adapters 78 enabling ISMP to RSA communication on a single machine 80 engine diagnostic tools 85 engine troubleshooting charts 89 error log 145 error messages 140 165 error procedures 105 Ethernet adapter teaming 81 Ethernet adapters testing with Intel PROSet II 99 Ethernet adapters specifying multiple 66 event log 145 example of creating a clustered file share 48 F failover 42 families and groups 17 Fast UTIL options 171 FAStT Host Adapter customizing 171 FAStT host bus adapter checking Fibre Channel connectivity 109 FAStT MSJ 2 77 testing the Fibre Channel host adapter wit
194. has at least one worldwide name associated with it A host with multiple network interfaces may have multiple worldwide names associated with it host application program An application program processed in the host computer host attachment A mode of SNA communication in which the processor acts as a secondary SNA device host computer 1 In a computer network a computer that usually performs network control functions and provides end users with services such as computation and database access T 2 The primary or controlling computer in a multiple computer installation or network 3 A computer used to prepare programs for use on another computer or on another data processing system for example a computer used to compile link edit or test programs to be used on another system 4 Synonym for host processor hot spare disk A physical disk that is automatically mapped to a logical drive if one of the logical drive s disks goes offline HTTP See Hypertext Transfer Protocol Hypertext Transfer Protocol In the Internet suite of protocols the protocol that is used to transfer and display hypertext documents IBM Disk Operating System DOS A disk operating system based on MS DOS that operates with all IBM compatible personal computers IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force iLUN iSCSI client logical unit number initial microcode load IML The action of loading the operational microcode initialize In a LAN to prepar
195. he hub information for debugging purposes The supportShow command executes the following commands in the order shown e version e tempShow e psShow e licenseShow e diagShow e errDump switchShow e portFlagsShow e portErrShow e mqShow portSemShow e portShow e portRegShow e portRouteShow e fabricShow e topologyShow e qlShow e nsShow nsAllShow e cfgShow e configShow e faultShow e traceShow e portLogDump The command is entered with the following parameters e firstPort specifies the first port of range of ports to dump information The default if no operand is specified is to print the state of port 0 If only firstPort is specified only the information for firstPort is printed e lastPort specifies the last port of range of ports to dump information If firstPort is specified but lastPort is not specified it defaults to printing firstPort only for the port based commands portShow portRegShow portRouteShow numLog specifies the number of lines of portLogDump to print 0 means dump all lines default N means dump the last N lines lt 0 means skip portLogDump Error messages Action codes and recommended actions able 3d shows the action codes and the recommended action for each action code listed in Table 30 Hub action codes Action number Recommended action 1 3 4 Replace the hub 2 Further diagnostic action required Failure can be system board GBIC embedded optic o
196. he midplane replaced service technician only Unable to access Drives and Fibre Fibre Channel Ensure that the Fibre drives Channel loop cabling has failed Channel cables are undamaged and properly connected RAID controller has Replace the RAID failed controller GBIC has failed 1 Ensure GBIC is seated properly 2 Replace GBIC Random errors Subsystem Midplane has failed Have the midplane replaced service technician only Replacing hot swap drives Drive problems include any malfunctions that delay interrupt or prevent successful I O activity between the hosts and the hard disk drives This section explains how to replace a failed drive Attention Failure to replace the drives might result in loss of data If you are replacing a drive that is part of a RAID level 1 or RAID level 5 logical drive ensure that you install the replacement drive in the correct bay Use the following procedure to replace host swap drives 1 Check the hardware and software documentation that is provided with the system to see if there are restrictions regarding hard disk drive configurations Some system Fibre Channel configurations might not allow mixing different drive capacities or types within an array Check the storage management software for recovery procedures for a drive that has failed Follow the steps in the software procedure before continuing with this procedure Determine the locat
197. hernet SCSI FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD FC2 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD FC2 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI LVD SE FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI HVD FC1 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet Ethernet FC2 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet FC1 FC1 186 Model 326 User s Reference Table 46 Four adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID FC2 Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 Ethernet SCSI Gigabit FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit SCSI HVD FC2 Ethernet SCSI HVD Gigabit FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC2 Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE Ethernet PRO 1000 SCSI HVD
198. hysical disk and network name in the same disk group you are creating the file share in The network name is dependent on the IP address so do not add that to the dependency list You can set the share permissions and advanced share resources also Users will access the cluster resources using knetwork name gt lt fileshare name gt Clustered file share creation example An example of how to create a clustered file share follows For this example assume that you are creating a file share in Disk Group 2 1 Create the IP address resource a b g Right click Disk Group 2 and select New gt Resource Enter an IP address name for example ipaddr2 and change the resource type to IP Address Select Run this resource in a separate Resource Monitor and click Next A list of possible owners appears and both nodes should remain as assigned Click Next There are no resource dependencies on this panel so click Next Enter your TCP IP parameters This will be the first virtual IP address The value in the Network field identifies to the system the network on which the address is located Click Finish to create the resource Right click the resource and select Bring online 2 Create the network name resource a b Right click Disk Group 2 and select New gt Resource Enter the virtual server name to use for example NN2 select Network Name as the resource type and click Next Both nodes are possible owners Click
199. hysical specifications electrical specifications cabling environmental specifications and networking specifications for installing the Model 326 e User s Reference This book describes such operational and administrative activities as Using the configuration utilities Administering the Model 326 Troubleshooting Using the Recovery and Supplementary CDs Hardcopy publications shipped with the Model 326 The following publications are shipped in hardcopy and are also provided in softcopy PDF form at http www ibm com storage support nas e IBM 5195 TotalStorage Network Attached Storage 300 Installation Guide GA27 4275 e Release Notes This document provides any changes that were not available at the time this book was produced Note that the User s Reference is provided in softcopy only Related publications Web sites The following publications contain additional information about the Model 326 e Network Attached Storage 300 Installation Guide GA27 4275 e Network Attached Storage 300 Service Guide GA27 4277 e UM Services User s Guide on the Documentation CD that came with the appliance Additional information on Universal Manageability Services IBM Director and Advanced System Management is located on the Documentation CD that came with the appliance The following Web site has additional and up to date information about the Model 326 http www ibm com storage nas A highly recommende
200. ically connect the adapters that you want to team to the same IP subnetwork Access the Model 326 desktop by directly attaching a keyboard mouse and monitor or over the network by starting Terminal Services on another workstation see ervice From the Model 326 desktop go to the Start menu then select Settings then select Control Panel Double click the Intel PROSet II icon in the Control Panel to start Intel PROSet ll You will see a list of all adapters for each slot and type supported under Network Components Under Network Components you will see a list of resident and non resident adapters for each slot and type supported Drivers are preset for all supported adapter configurations but will be loaded only for resident adapters Identify which adapters you are going to team Left click the adapter under Network Components and select one of the adapters that will be part of the teaming Right click the adapter select Add to Team then select Create New Team Select the type of team to create Select the adapters to add to the team from the list and then select Next Verify that these settings are correct and then select Finish Perform Steps i through Ed for the other node This procedure creates a device named Intel Advanced Network Services Virtual Adapter It also binds all network protocols that were bound to the physical adapters that were added to the team to this virtual adapter and unbinds those protocols f
201. ice 41 Remove the AC power to the system wait 20 seconds Processor but the Service and reconnect the AC power Wait 30 seconds and Processor failed to respond power on the system at the start of POST Flash update the service processor System board 2 0 ON Processor PCI board 1762 Hard disk drive configuration error Run Configuration Setup Hard disk cables Hard disk adapter Hard disk drive SCSI backplane System board D M2 o Ns 178X Hard disk drive error Run diagnostics Hard disk cables Hard disk adapter Hard disk drive System board Ce ON 1800 No more hardware interrupts Run Configuration Setup available for PCI adapter Failing adapter on gt System board 1962 Drive does not contain a Verify that a bootable operating system is installed valid boot sector Run diagnostics Hard disk drive SCSI backplane Cable System board oa hon 5962 IDE CD ROM configuration error Run Configuration Setup CD ROM drive CD ROM power cable IDE Cable System board on foON gt Battery 8603 Pointing device error Pointing device N System board Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 143 Table 27 POST error messages continued Error code Symptom 00019501 Meaning Processor 1 is not functioning FRU action ae mn Check VRM and processor LEDs VRM 1 VAM 2 Processor 1 Processor board System bo
202. ide procedures You are now ready to install the IAACU Console application from the Supplementary CD Install the Advanced Appliance Configuration console application from the Supplementary CD onto a Windows NT 4 0 or Windows 2000 workstation that is attached to the same IP subnetwork to which the appliance is attached Note The IAACU creates a private database that is specific to the IP subnetwork to which it is attached Therefore do not install it on more than one systems management console residing on the same IP subnetwork For information on how to install the IAACU Console see Table 23 on page 128 After you install the Advanced Appliance Configuration console application the following steps will take you to the point where you can administer the appliance O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 25 1 Start the Advanced Appliance Configuration console application by clicking its icon 2 On the left pane of the Advanced Appliance Configuration console select the appliance to administer Initially the appliance name is IBM5195 serial number the serial number is located in the lower right corner of the bezel on the front of the appliance 3 Click the Start Web Management button to start the Universal Manageability UM Services browser This will open a separate Web browser window Accessing Universal Manageability Services 1 You will be prompted to authenticate with the administrative user name Administrator and passwor
203. iderations Powering off the Model 326 when clustering is active 1 Make note of the order in which you shut down the nodes You shut the nodes down one at a time and in the powering on procedure you start the nodes in the opposite order in which you powered them off On the node that you want to shut down last the second node click Cluster Administration located in IBM NAS Admin in the Cluster Tools folder If prompted for a cluster name enter the name of the cluster and then click Open Make sure that all resources are in the online state With all clustered resources in the online state on the node that you want to shut down first the first node go to Start gt Shut Down and select Shut down from the drop down menu Click OK On the second node in Cluster Administrator wait for all resources to failover to that node and return to the online state When all resources are in the online state and the first node has shut down on the second node go to Start Shutdown and select Shut down from the drop down menu Click OK When both nodes have shut down power off each 5191 RAID Storage Controller by pressing the two power switches located on the rear of the unit Power off all 5192 Network Attached Storage Storage Units and 3534 Managed Hubs You can power down any network hubs or switches that are used exclusively by the Model 326 If they are used by other network attached devices do not power these off You can
204. ides assistance for e Setting up your network attached storage appliance Limited configuration assistance Please have the following information ready when you call e Machine type and model e Serial numbers of your IBM hardware products or your proof of purchase e Description of the problem e Exact wording of any error messages e Hardware and software configuration information If possible be at your computer when you call In the U S and Canada these services are available 24 hours a day 7 days a week In the U K these services are available Monday through Friday from 9 00 a m to 6 00 p m In all other countries contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative 3 3 Response time will vary depending on the number and complexity of incoming calls Appendix B Getting help service and information 131 132 Model 326 User s Reference Appendix C Purchasing additional services During and after the warranty period you can purchase additional services such as support for IBM and non IBM hardware operating systems and application programs network setup and configuration upgraded or extended hardware repair services and custom installations Service availability and name might vary by country Warranty and repair services You can upgrade your standard hardware warranty service or extend the service beyond the warranty period Warranty upgrades in the U S include e On site service to premium on
205. ied when the diskette was created When it locates a backup image it begins restoring the system drive from the image During the restore operation the hard disk drive LED on the front right of the node s hard disk drive will flash green or stay nearly solid green this indicates write activity to the system volume Note If the hard disk drive LED stays off for at least 10 minutes since you restarted the node then there is a problem with the recovery procedure 66 Model 326 User s Reference and it will not be able to restore the system volume from a backup image Should this occult ou will need to restore the system drive as described in 4 When the restore operation completes the hard disk drive LED turns off and a short song will play periodically every 15 seconds Remove the diskette set the write protection tab back to the write enabled position and reinsert the diskette The log file RESULTS HTM will be written to the diskette this log file can be viewed with any Web browser to examine the results of the restore operation 5 When the log file is written another song will play continuously Remove the diskette and restart the node If the restore was successful the node will come back up in the state it was in at the time you created the backup image used for the recovery operation Note The persistent image that was created on the system drive named System Backup by the backup process is restored by the restore p
206. ies you have previously defined The Tree View Pane also includes groups for appliances that do not fit any of the defined Families that were not configured using the IAACU or that have IP addresses that conflict with other devices on your network When you click any item in the Tree View information about that item and any items that are nested below that item in the tree view appears in the Information Pane e The Information Pane The Information Pane located on the right side of the IAACU Console displays information about the item that is currently selected in the Tree View Pane The information that appears in the Information Pane varies depending on the item that is selected For example if you select the All Appliances item from the Tree View Pane the Information Pane displays configuration information IP settings Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools 15 host name serial number and so on about each of the Model 326 appliances that have been discovered by the IAACU Console However if you select a Family the Information Pane displays information about the Family settings for the selected Family The IAACU Console also features the following menus File Use the File menu to import or export the IAACU Console configuration data to scan the network or to exit the program Family Use the Family menu to add or delete Families or to move Families up or down in the tree view Appliance Use the Appliance menu
207. igabit FC1 SCSI SE Quad Gigabit FC1 Quad SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE Quad PRO 1000 FC1 Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI Quad Gigabit FC2 LVD SE Quad Gigabit SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD Quad Gigabit FC2 Quad PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC2 SCSI Quad PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE Quad PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC2 SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 FC2 Quad Gigabit SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI Quad Gigabit FC1 LVD SE Quad Gigabit SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD Quad Gigabit FC1 Quad PRO 1000 SCSI LVD SE FC1 SCSI Quad PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE Quad PRO 1000 SCSI HVD FC1 SCSI HVD Quad PRO 1000 FC1 Quad SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC2 SCSI ServeRAID Quad FC2 LVD SE Quad SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC2 SCSI HVD ServeRAID Quad FC2 Quad ServeRAID FC2 Gigabit ServeRAID Quad Gigabit FC2 Quad ServeRAID FC2 PRO 1000 ServeRAID Quad PRO 1000 FC2 Quad SCSI LVD SE ServeRAID FC1 SCSI ServeRAID Quad FC1 LVD SE Quad ServeRAID FC2 FC1 ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC2 Quad ServeRAID FC1 FC1 ServeRAID Quad FC1 FC1 Quad FC1 FC1 FC1 Quad FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC2 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC2 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 Ethernet Ethernet Gigabit FC1 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet PRO 1000 FC1 Ethernet Ethernet SCSI LVD SE FC2 Ethernet Et
208. iguration 4 Run Configuration Setup and Diagnostics ener 2 Diskette Drive 3 Drive Cable 4 System board 762 Coprocessor configuration 1 Run Configuration Setup a 2 Battery 3 Processor 962 Parallel port error 1 Disconnect external cable on parallel port 2 Run Configuration Setup 3 System board 11XX System board serial port 1 or 4 Disconnect external cable on serial port Oron 2 Run Configuration Setup 3 System board 0001200 Machine check architecture 1 Processor ee 2 Optional Processor 0001295 ECC circuit check 1 System board 2 Processor 1301 C cable to front panel not 4 Cable found 2 Front panel 3 Power switch assembly 4 System board 1302 IC cable from system board 41 Cable re tn 2 Power Switch Assembly 3 System board 1303 IC cable from system board 1 Cable backplane not 2 Power backplane 3 System board 1304 IC cable to diagnostic LED 4 Cable poardinol Touna 2 Diagnostic LED Board 3 Power Switch Assembly 4 System board 142 Model 326 User s Reference Table 27 POST error messages continued Error Meaning FRU action code Symptom 1600 The Service Processor is not functioning Ensure that a jumper is not installed on J 51 2 Remove the AC power to the system wait 20 seconds and then reconnect the AC power Wait 30 seconds then power on the appliance 3 System board 4 Processor PCI board 1601 The system is able to Suspected part communicate to the Serv
209. iguration By DOS utility By DOS utility serial ports Aggregate from other No Yes ISMP processors Chapter 7 Managing adapters and controllers 79 Enabling ISMP to RSA communication on a single machine You must follow one of two methods to enable communication between the ISMP and the RSA on a single machine e Using a single ISMP interconnect cable with dual RJ 11 plugs 1 Connect one end of the internal ISMP interconnect cable to the J 54 connector on the system board 2 Connect the other end the RJ 11 socket of the internal ISMP interconnect cable to the knockout slot on the back panel of the machine until it locks into place 3 Connect one connector on the ISMP interconnect cable to the RJ 11 socket you just installed on the back panel in step bh 4 Connect the other connector to the RJ 11 socket on the RSA e Using two ISMP interconnect cables each with a single RJ 11 plug 1 Connect one end of the internal ISMP interconnect cable to the J 54 connector on the system board 2 Connect the other end with the RJ 11 socket of the internal ISMP interconnect cable to the knockout slot on the back panel of the machine until it locks into place 3 Connect the first ISMP interconnect cable to the RJ 11 socket that you just installed on the back panel in step bh 4 Connect the second ISMP interconnect cable to the RJ 11 socket on the RSA 5 Connect the two ISMP interconnect cables with a single Category 5 E
210. igure the PSM recovery diskette to target the 10 100 Ethernet adapter to be used for disaster recovery over the network On the PSM recovery diskette edit the file a net_sets bat and add the following line set SLOT slotvalue where slotvalue is one of the following depending on the PCI slot on the rear of the node in which the targeted 10 100 Ethernet adapter is installed 0x0027 For the integrated Ethernet adapter 0x0001 For PCI slot 1 0x0022 For PCI slot 2 0x0023 For PCI slot 3 0x0044 For PCI slot 4 0x0045 For PCI slot 5 Restoring the system drive using the PSM recovery diskette To restore the system drive from a backup image created through the PSM Disaster Recovery panel as described above you must use a PSM recovery diskette created through the Disaster Recovery panel If you did not create a PSM recovery diskette ou must use the Recovery CD as described in APTO NTE to restore the system drive to its original factory configuration To restore the system drive 1 Set the write protection tab of the PSM recovery diskette to the write protect position This prevents accidental initiation of the recovery process by booting the node with the PSM recovery diskette in the diskette drive 2 Insert the PSM recovery diskette in the diskette drive of the node and restart the node 3 The recovery process begins The PSM recovery diskette software locates the first backup image it can find based on the backup locations specif
211. ime persistent True Image data views of any or all system and data volumes residing on the NAS All persistent images survive system a power loss or a planned or unplanned reboot Each instance of PSM seamlessly handles 250 concurrent images of up to 255 independent volumes for a total of 63 750 independent data images personal computer NFS daemon PCNFSD A daemon that manages user authentication and print spooling Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA An organization that standardizes credit card size memory and I O adapters for personal computers PING See packet internet groper pinout Information that specifies which signal signal line or cable wire maps to each pin on a module card or cable connector A module is usually keyed to allow for pin number identification primary adapter In a personal computer that is used on a LAN and that supports installation of two network adapters the adapter that uses standard or default mapping between adapter shared RAM adapter ROM and designated computer memory segments The primary adapter is usually designated as adapter 0 in configuration parameters Contrast with alternate adapter promiscuous mode In a local area network LAN a method of processing and monitoring LAN frames that does not discriminate based on address PSM See Persistent Storage Manager Q QoS Quality of service Glossary of terms and abbreviations 215 R RAID See redunda
212. in the context of the Windows name space To define a local UNIX name space continue with Fusing a local UNIX name space on page 44 Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup 43 Using a local UNIX name space You should have to perform this procedure only once You might have to add more groups and users in the Server for PCNFS page if you add more users and groups to your UNIX environment and Model 326 or Windows domain at a later time 1 NS ARON 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Open the IBM NAS Administration console by double clicking the IBM NAS Admin icon on the NAS desktop In the left pane expand File Systems then expand Services for UNIX In the left pane click Server for NFS In the right pane in the Computer name field enter localhost In the left pane click Server for PCNFS In the right pane click Groups On the Groups page you must add the groups from your UNIX host to which all of your UNIX users belong You must know both the group name and the group ID GID number This information can be found in the etc group file on most UNIX systems As an example on an AIX system in the following line from an etc group file the fields are separated by a colon The first field staff is the group name the third column 1 is the GID staff 1 pemodem ipsec netinst protcs To add a group enter the group name and GID number in the Group name and Gr
213. information bearing signal T 2 The process by which a message signal is impressed upon a carrier signal so that the carrier is altered to represent the message signal multicast address See LAN multicast multimode optical fiber 1 A graded index or step index optical fiber that allows more than one bound mode to propagate E Contrast with single mode optical fiber 2 In FDDI an optical fiber waveguide usually characterized by a core diameter of 50 to 100 micron that will allow a large number of modes to propagate multiplexing In data transmission a function that permits two or more data sources to share a common transmission medium so that each data source has its own channel A 1 N N See Newton nanosecond ns One thousand millionth of a second NAS Network attached storage NDMP See network data management protocol network attached storage NAS A task optimized storage device directly attached to a network that works independent of the general purpose file servers network data management protocol NDMP An open standard protocol for enterprise wide network based backup for network attached storage Network File System NFS A protocol developed by Sun Microsystems Incorporated that allows any host in a network to mount another host s file directories After a file directory is mounted it appears to reside on the local host network information services NIS A set of UNIX network services for examp
214. ing the logical drives Note the following restrictions when formatting logical drives il Disk O the internal hard disk drive is an 18 GB drive preformatted into two partitions a 6 GB partition label System drive letter C and a 12 GB partition label MAINTENANCE drive letter D Do not reformat or repartition these partitions Doing so could delete important data and seriously impair the functioning of your system Do not upgrade any disks to dynamic Only basic disks are supported for clustering In addition all partitions used for clustering must be primary partitions Do not use drive letter F as a volume drive letter This drive letter is reserved for Persistent Storage Manager PSM based backup using NAS Backup Assistant Using the preset factory configuration T After rebooting open IBM NAS Admin and select Disk Management Local in the Storage folder At the Write Signature and Upgrade Disk Wizard click Cancel Right click the Unknown disk on the bottom right and select Write Signature Check all the boxes to write a Disk Signature to all disks that will be accessed by the Cluster Server all disks in the view On the unformatted drive Right click and select Create Partition and click Next Select Primary Partition and click Next Select the entire disk size and click Next preferred method Choose a drive letter for this volume Enter the following properties e File System of NTFS e Volume Label
215. inister the appliance by adjusting information contained in the following task groups Note In this example you access the task groups through the Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage Web based GUI 26 Model 326 User s Reference Although you can modify multiple appliance and network attributes in each task group the information given here is the minimum you need to know to administer the appliance and network You can find more information on administration elsewhere in this book and in the online help You can access these task groups in one of three ways 1 Click the Home tab and then select the task group link 2 Click the top tab associated with that task group 3 Click the Back button on the browser until you arrive Home and then select the task group link Setting the date and time To change the date and time click Date and Time Remember that you can also access all of these task groups by clicking the titled tabs at the top of the page The Set Date and Time page appears allowing you to adjust information as necessary Setting up the network Note All appliances have an initial default user name of administrator and password of password As part of the Network task group you can change the administrator password and optionally you can configure the properties of each network interface that resides on the appliance To change the administrator password click Change Administrator Pass
216. intervention This action is accomplished by the adapter in the device and can be initiated by a network management program balun A transformer used to connect balanced cables such as twisted pair cables to unbalanced cables such as coaxial cables by matching the electrical characteristics of the cables bandwidth aggregation The ability to establish more than one communication channel per connection bandwidth augmentation The ability to add another communication channel to an already existing communication channel bandwidth distance product The parameter specified for bulk fiber that defines the distance that a signal at a defined frequency can be transmitted with a specified loss usually half the power at zero frequency Use of a fiber with a bandwidth distance product of 500 MHz km would support 250 MHz for a distance of 2 km baseband LAN A local area network in which data are encoded and transmitted without modulation of a carrier T Basic Input Output System The personal computer code that controls basic hardware operations such as interactions with diskette drives hard disk drives and the keyboard baud 1 A unit of signaling speed equal to the number of discrete conditions or signal events per second for example one baud equals one half dot cycle per second in Morse code one bit per second in a train of binary signals and one 3 bit value per second in a train of signals each of which can assume one of eight differ
217. ion 2001 Pennsylvania Avenue N W Washington D C 20006 Definitions are identified by the symbol E after the definition e The Information Technology Vocabulary developed by Subcommittee 1 Joint Technical Committee 1 of the International Organization for Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission ISO IEC JTC1 SC1 Definitions of published parts of this vocabulary are identified by the symbol I after the definition definitions taken from draft international standards committee drafts and working papers being developed by ISO IEC JTC1 SC1 are identified by the symbol T after the definition indicating that final agreement has not yet been reached among the participating National Bodies of SC1 Numerics 10BASE2 The IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard that supports a transmission rate of 10 Mbps using RG 58 A U and RG 58 C U coaxial cable and BNC connectors 10BASE2 is sometimes called thin Ethernet or thinnet 10BASE5 The IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard that supports a transmission rate of 10 Mbps using a 50 ohm coaxial cable with Type N connectors over a distance of up to 500 m 1640 ft without using repeaters 10BASE5 is sometimes called thick Ethernet or thicknet 10BASE FL The IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard that supports a transmission rate of 10 Mbps using optical fiber 10BASE T The IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard that supports a transmission rate of 10 Mbps using two twisted pair wires Category 3 telephone wiri
218. ion of the drive to remove Attention Never hot swap a drive CRU when its green Activity LED is flashing Hot swap a drive CRU only when its amber drive fault LED is on and not flashing or when the drive is inactive with the green Activity LED on and not flashing 116 Model 326 User s Reference 4 Remove the drive CRU a Press on the inside of the bottom of the tray handle to release the blue latch Pull the handle J on the tray El out into the open position Lift the drive CRU partially out of the bay d To avoid possible damage to the drive J wait at least 20 seconds before fully removing the drive CRU from the RAID controller to allow for the drive to spin down e Verify that there is proper identification such as a label on the drive CRU and then slide it completely out of the 5191 RAID Storage Controller f If you are replacing the drive ensure that the filler piece remains in place for use with the new drive 5 Install the new drive CRU a Gently push the drive CRU into the empty bay until the tray handle H touches the storage server bezel b Push the tray handle J down into the closed latched position 6 Check the drive LEDs a When a drive is ready for use the green Activity LED is on and the amber drive fault LED is off b If the amber drive fault LED is on and not flashing remove the drive from the unit and wait 10 seconds then reinstall the drive 7 Return to normal operation
219. ion of the new persistent image might fail and an error message will be written to the system event log The event source is psman5 and the text of the error message is A persistent image could not be created due to error 0xc0000043 This message is generated because when PSM is reinitializing the PSM cache file on a particular volume after you delete the last persistent image on that volume a new persistent image cannot be created If this error occurs wait for a few minutes and then try to create the persistent image again e If you use the Windows Powered Disk Defragmenter to attempt to defragment a volume containing persistent images the volume will not be defragmented If you select the volume and click the Defragment button the Disk Defragmenter will run on the volume and then indicate that the volume was successfully defragmented However the Analysis display will appear the same as it did before you clicked Defragment which indicates that defragmentation did not take place You can defragment volumes without persistent images Attention The recovery process invalidates persistent images and leaves them in an inconsistent state So if you plan to use the Recovery CD it is recommended that you first delete all persistent images to ensure a clean reload of the system software For more information on using the Recovery CD see Chapter 9 Using Microsoft Services for UNIX and NFS Support Support for the Network File Sy
220. is document contains certain notices that relate to a specific topic The caution and danger notices also appear in the multilingual Safety Information on the Documentation CD that came with the appliance Each notice is numbered for easy reference to the corresponding notices in the Safety Information The following terms used within this document or within the Safety Information have these specific meanings Term Definition in this document Attention These notices indicate possible damage to programs devices or data An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which damage could occur Caution These notices indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you A caution notice is placed just before descriptions of potentially hazardous procedure steps or situations Danger These notices indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to you A danger notice is placed just before descriptions of potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure steps or situations Notes These notices provide important tips guidance or advice Publications The latest versions of the following product publications are available in softcopy at http www ibm com storage support nas Copyright IBM Corp 2002 xi Descriptions of the Model 326 publications The Model 326 library consists of the following publications Hardware Installation Guide This book describes hardware p
221. ition will then be formatted When formatting is complete the status of the partition should appear as Healthy and the other properties should appear as Name Maintenance e Drive letter D e File system FAT32 Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 67 Granting user access to persistent image files You can give end users access to files in the persistent images For example this would be helpful to a user who has accidentally corrupted a file and needs to get an uncorrupted copy of that file To enable end user access to persistent image files 1 Go into Terminal Services 2 Click the My Computer icon 3 Select the volume on which you want to enable persistent image access 4 Go into the persistent images directory and right click the mouse on the selected persistent image mount point select Sharing then specify sharing as appropriate If you want to enable the same access to all persistent images on the volume right click the persistent images directory from the top level of the volume select Sharing and then specify sharing as appropriate Note The share settings are maintained in a persistent image Therefore granting access to all end users only permits those users to access files and directories within the persistent image that they had permission to access originally on the actual drive PSM notes You can take and keep a maximum of 250 persistent images at one time These can be taken
222. l 326 then log in using an ID and password defined on the Model 326 with administrative authority From the command line you can issue DOS like commands such as dir and cd and some UNIX like commands such as grep and vi You can launch some applications but only character mode applications are supported By default the Telnet server is disabled To enable the Telnet server from the Windows 2000 for NAS user interface go to the Network task group then select Telnet On the Telnet Administration Configuration page select the Enable Telnet access to this appliance check box If you do not require Telnet access to the Model 326 then it is recommended that you leave the Telnet server disabled SNMP support Support for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is enabled To manage the Model 326 from an SNMP capable management application you must install the management information base MIB files for various components of the Model 326 on the management application workstation so that the application can recognize those SNMP elements values alerts and so on supported by the components 24 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 3 Getting started This chapter gives details to set up the initial communication to the Model 326 to enable setup and configuration These instructions refer specifically to a base configuration as shipped and do not cover the setup of additional storage units which can be purchased separately
223. lable to you through Windows 2000 for NAS include e Status e Network e Disks e Users e Shares e Maintenance e Controller To start Windows 2000 for NAS use one of these methods e UM Services described in step El e Web browser by entering http ip address 8099 or http computer_name 8099 and then logging on to the Model 326 Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools 23 e Model 326 desktop while using Terminal Services Client and starting a browser You can access online help for Windows 2000 for NAS in two ways 1 Click the Help button at the top of any Web page This displays a table of contents that you can navigate to find help for any Windows 2000 for NAS task 2 Click the question mark button at the top of any Web page This displays context sensitive help for the task you are currently performing Telnet Server support CAUTION When you Telnet to another machine your user name and password are sent over the network in plain unencrypted text The Model 326 includes Telnet server capability The Telnet server provides limited administrative capability This can be useful in cases where you need to remotely administer the Model 326 but do not have access to a Windows based workstation from which you could remotely administer the appliance through a supported Web browser or Terminal Services Client To access the Model 326 from any Telnet client specify the IP address or host name of the Mode
224. le a distributed service for retrieving information about the users groups network addresses and gateways in a network that resolve naming and addressing differences among computers in a network newton N The force that when applied to a body having a mass of one kilogram gives it an acceleration of one meter per second per second 1 m s 2 NFS See network file system NI See network interface NIS See network information services non broadcast frame A frame containing a specific destination address and that can contain routing information specifying which bridges are to forward it A bridge will forward a non broadcast frame only if that bridge is included in the frame s routing information non canonical In this form the most significant bit of an octet is transmitted first ns See nanosecond O ODI See Open Data Link Interface Open Data Link Interface ODI A common interface for network drivers developed by Novell It allows multiple transport protocols to run on one network adapter optical cable A fiber multiple fibers or a fiber bundle in a structure built to meet optical mechanical and environmental specifications E optical fiber Any filament made of dielectric materials that guides light regardless of its ability to send signals 214 Model 326 Users Reference optical fiber coupler 1 A device whose purpose is to distribute optical power among two or more ports A 2 A device whose purpo
225. lect a screen size in which the Model 326 desktop will appear It is recommended that you choose a size other than full screen Click Connect to start the Terminal Services Client session A user login window appears Log in Type Administrator in the Username field type password in the Password field and then click OK to log in After you log in you can begin using Terminal Services Client to configure and manage the Model 326 as if a keyboard mouse and monitor were directly attached to it The Model 326 desktop contains a shortcut titled IBM NAS Admin to a special console the IBM NAS Administration console 12 Model 326 Users Reference IBM NAS Administration console The IBM NAS Administration console includes all the standard functions provided by the standard Computer Management console available on any Windows 2000 desktop plus the following functions specific to the Model 326 Cluster Administration see EConfiguring clusters on page 41 e Storage Manager see e These advanced functions see Advanced System Management Integrated Adapter and Remote Supervisor Adapter FASET MSJ NAS Backup Assistant Persistent Storage Manager Determining who is using the network attached storage Occasionally you might want to know who is using the network attached storage To determine this information 1 Start a Windows Terminal Services session from the administrator s console to the Model 326 2
226. line 130 service 129 telephone 131 system drive recovering using the PSM recovery diskette 66 system management adapters enabling communication between 78 T teaming Ethernet adapter 81 Telnet Server support 24 Terminal Services 2 25 Terminal Services installing 12 Terminal Services and the IBM NAS Administration Console 12 Terminal Services Client 11 testing Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter 101 Ethernet adapters with Intel PROSet II 99 Fibre Channel host adapter with FAStT MSJ 108 Integrated System Management Processor ISMP 109 Remote Supervisor Adapter RSA 110 SCSI adapters 111 ServeRAID 4Lx adapter 107 Tivoli Storage Manager Client 2 tools for configuration and administration 9 trademarks 128 troubleshooting 85 10 100 PCI Ethernet adapter 98 adapters 96 Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter 101 Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter 100 IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU 111 IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ engine 85 troubleshooting continued IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller 113 IBM 5192 Storage Unit Model ORU 118 integrating Ethernet adapter 96 network connection problems 96 power problems 91 PRO 1000 XT Server adapter chart 102 ServeRAID 4Lx 103 troubleshooting charts 89 10 100 Mbps integrated Ethernet adapter 97 SCSI HVD 3570 adapter 107 ServeRAlD 4Lx 106 tutorial NAS Setup Navigator 3 U UM Services launching 22 23 starting 22 system re
227. ll now have a Media created on date time listed under file 60 Model 326 User s Reference 6 Click the plus sign to the left of this media to see the set list You might be prompted to enter the path to the file you want to catalog if so select the same file that you just imported This will build a set list 7 Select the files and directories to restore 8 Select Alternate Location from the Restore files to pull down 9 In the alternate location window select the root directory of the original backup drive letter you determined see the note on page l60 10 To change restore options select Tools from the menu bar at the top of the window and then select Options Refer to NT Backup online help see Restore files from a file or a tape for use of these options 11 After you select the files or directories for restore the alternate location and options click the Start Restore button 12 Atthe prompt confirm that you want to begin the restore Click the Advanced button to select advanced options see the NT Backup online help for details then click OK to begin the restore Persistent Images A persistent image is a copy you make of one or more file system volumes at a specific time You can use the Persistent Images function to restore a file or volume to the state it was in at the time you created the persistent image Persistent images are maintained in a way that minimizes the storage required to keep multiple
228. llowing a failover If you restart a cluster node resources that are preferentially owned by the restarted node failback to that node when the cluster service detects that the node is operational and provided that the defined failover policy allows this to occur If you have not defined the node as the preferred owner for the resources then they do not failback to the node Note You must reboot before you can see changes made to the cluster resource balancing Setting up failover The failover of resources under a disk group on a node enables users to continue accessing the resources if the node goes down Individual resources contained in a group cannot be moved to the other node rather the group it is contained in is moved If a disk group contains a large number of resources and any one of those resources fails then the whole group will failover according to the group s failover policy The setup of the failover policies is critical to data availability To set up the failover function 1 Open the Properties panel for the disk group 2 Select the Failover tab to set the Threshold for Disk Group Failure For example if a network name fails clustering services attempts to failover the group 10 times within six hours but if the resource fails an eleventh time the resource remains in a failed state and administrator action is required to correct the failure 3 Select the Failback tab to allow or prevent failback of the disk gr
229. loped by Cisco With FEC you can create a team of two to four ports on an adapter to increase transmission and reception throughput The FEC might also be referred to as load balancing port aggregation or trunking When you configure this feature the adapter ports comprising the FEC team or group create a single high speed fault tolerant link between the engine and the Ethernet switch sharing one IP address With FEC fault tolerance and load balancing is provided for both outbound and inbound traffic unlike other load balancing schemes that only balance outbound traffic Note FEC requires an Ethernet switch with FEC capability The FEC implementation on the 4 port 10 100 Ethernet adapter does not support the optional Port Aggregation Protocol PAgP feature of FEC capable Ethernet switches 802 3ad is an IEEE industry standard similar to Cisco s FEC Gigabit Etherchannel GEC 802 3ad requires an Ethernet switch with 802 3ad capability Note It is strongly recommended that you configure adapter teaming before you et up Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS clustering as described in Chapter 7 Managing adapters and controllers 81 bage 371 Additionally for each team you configure on one node you must configure an identical team same type of team same set of adapters and so on on the other node To configure adapter teaming use Intel PROSet II which is preloaded on the Model 326 as follows 1 7 8 9 10 11 Phys
230. lot Note Check the System Error Log before replacing a part S 1 Adapter 2 SCSI backplane 3 Cable 035 XXX SNN NN SCSI ID of failing hard Note Check the System Error Log before replacing a disk part Hard disk drive with SCSI ID NN on RAID adapter in PCI slot S 035 253 599 RAID adapter initialization 1 Obtain the basic and extended configuration status failure ServeRAID Adapter in 2 Adapt slot S is not configured epler properly 3 SCSI backplane 4 Cable 075 XXX 000 Failed power supply test Power supply 089 XXX 001 Failed microprocessor test 1 VRM 1 for microprocessor 1 2 Microprocessor 1 089 XXX 002 Failed test for optional 1 VRM 2 ee 2 Optional microprocessor 2 166 250 000 System Management failed I2C cable is disconnected Reconnect I2C cable between Remote Supervisor Adapter and system board Reseat the I2C cables between Remote Supervisor Adapter in PCI slot 1 J44 and system board J45 12C cables Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 149 Table 28 Diagnostic error messages continued Error Code Meaning FRU action 166 198 000 dl ae Re run the Diagnostic Test sa ve Fix other error conditions and retry These include other Remote Supervisor Adapter Failed System Management tests and items logged in the It may be busy Run the tesi optional Remote Supervisor Adapters System Error Log again Communication with 3 Disconnect all server and option powe
231. luster Administration function starts You have now completed cluster setup Configuring clusters This section contains procedures to assist you in configuring basic cluster functions It is assumed that the cluster installation procedures in have completed without errors and both cluster nodes are running etup on page 40 It is recommended that you review the Cluster Administration Guide located in the IBM NAS Admin in the Cluster Tools folder before continuing with the following steps Configuring cluster state and properties You must complete the following steps to reset the size of the logfile and set the priority and purpose of the private network 1 Select Cluster Administration located in IBM NAS Admin in the Cluster Tools folder If prompted for a cluster name enter the name of the cluster and then click Open 2 The cluster name appears in the left panel Click the cluster name to see the status of the cluster nodes in the right pane The state of both nodes should be Up 3 Right click the cluster name and select Properties a Select Quorum Disk and change the Reset quorum log at field from 64 KB to 4096 KB b Select Network Priority to view all networks acknowledged by the cluster server then select the private network connection and move it to the top for cluster communication priority by clicking the Move Up button This provides internal communication to the private network before attemp
232. lutions to the PRO 1000 XT Server adapter problems that have definite symptoms Table 15 PRO 1000 XT Server adapter troubleshooting chart PRO 1000 XT Server adapter problem Suggested action The PRO 1000 XT Server 1 Verify that the adapter is seated firmly in the slot adapter can not be found fee machine 3 Try a different PRO 1000 XT Server adapter Diagnostics pass but the 1 Verify that the responding link is operating correctly connection alls 2 Ensure that the network cable is securely attached 3 Try a different cable Another adapter stopped operating correctly after you installed the PRO 1000 XT 1 Verify that the cable is securely connected to the PRO 1000 XT Server adapter and not to another adapter 2 Check for a resource conflict Server adapter 3 Reload all PCI device drivers 4 Ensure that both adapters are seated firmly in the slot 5 Check all cables PRO 1000 XT Server 1 Ensure that the cable is the correct type adapter is unable to connect 2 Try another cable at 1000 Mbps instead it connects at 100 Mbps Copper based connections only The adapter stopped working without apparent cause Reseat the adapter The network driver files might be damaged or deleted Reinstall the drivers Reboot the machine Try a different cable Use a different PRO 1000 XT Server adapter OW 302 ID at LINK LED is off Ensure that you have loaded the adapter driver
233. ly necessary to restore the preloaded system image To recover the preloaded image on a failed node perform the following steps 1 Delete all persistent images to ensure a clean reload of the system software Note The recovery process invalidates persistent images and leaves them in a state that is inconsistent with their pre recovery state 2 On the other operational node of the Model 326 select Cluster Administration located in the Cluster Tools folder in the IBM NAS Admin If prompted for a cluster name enter the name of the cluster and then click Open Copyright IBM Corp 2002 123 3 The cluster name appears in the left panel Right click the failed node machine name and select Evict Node The name of the failed node will be removed from the left pane and the cluster will now contain only the operational node of the Model 326 4 Attach a keyboard and monitor to the failed node 5 Insert the Recovery Enablement Diskette into the diskette drive and place Recovery CD 1 into the CD ROM drive of the failed node m Important The Recovery Enablement Diskette enables the Model 326 to start from the CD ROM drive You will not be able to restore the preload image from the Recovery CD Set without first restarting the appliance using the Recovery Enablement Diskette 6 Restart the appliance 7 If you installed additional processor memory on the appliance the BIOS configuration program will appear Click Con
234. main account on the PDC i 2 Cluster setup 40 Right click My Computer and click Properties Click Network Identification The System Properties dialog box displays the full computer name and workgroup or domain Click Properties and perform these steps to join a domain a Select the Domain radio button b Type the name of your domain and click OK c When prompted enter the Administrator user ID and password and click OK Close the System Properties window Restart the node and proceed with Cluster setup After the computer restarts it is recommended that you do not log in to the domain If you do you will see the Windows 2000 Configure Your Server window Click the will configure this server later radio button and then click the Next button On the next window clear the Show this screen at startup check box and click Finish At this step you have completed the cluster installation steps on each node and are ready to set up the cluster Perform the following steps 1 To begin setting up the cluster on the node open IBM NAS Admin then the Cluster Tools folder and click the Cluster Setup icon At the prompt verify that you have completed the steps that precede this cluster setup step If you have click the Continue button If this is the first node click the First Node button If this is the joining node go to Step 12 on page 41 and continue from there The Cluster Information panel appea
235. mal operation 1 Restore the entire boot drive of the node if needed Otherwise restore the System State to the node 2 Ensure that the cluster service is stopped on the other node 50 Model 326 User s Reference 3 Restore the Quorum cluster information to that node by selecting to restore at least the system state This creates a temporary folder under the Winnt Cluster folder called Cluster backup 4 Run the Clusrest exe tool to rebuild the Quorum drive The tool moves the cluster information from the node s boot drive to the Quorum drive 5 After you complete the process and the cluster service has started successfully on the newly restored node restart the cluster service on the other node Notes 1 If you do not follow this process and another node with a more current database takes ownership of the Quorum before you update the database from the restored node the restore does not work 2 Restoring a Quorum rolls the cluster back in time to the backup date There are impacts to performing this operation that include loss of data You should perform this operation only when it is absolutely necessary Before you add software You have now completed networking and clustering setup and administration and the Model 326 is at a point where you can install software on it But before you do it is recommended that you take advantage of the Persistent Storage Manager PSM disaster recovery function detailed in ED
236. mework and Microsoft Systems Management Server SMS to integrate portions of UM Services into their systems management console Because it was designed to use industry standard information gathering technologies and messaging protocols including Common Information Model CIM Desktop Management Interface DMI and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP UM Services adds value to any of these supported workgroup or enterprise systems management platforms You can use UM Services to perform the following tasks e View detailed information about your computers including operating system memory network cards and hardware e Track your computers with features such as power management event log and system monitor capabilities e Upwardly integrate with Tivoli Enterprise Tivoli Netview Computer Associates Unicenter Microsoft SMS and Intel LANDesk Management Suite Complete documentation on how to use UM Services is included on the Documentation CD that came with the appliance System requirements The UM Services client is preinstalled on the Model 326 appliance However you must have a Web browser installed on your systems management console It is recommended that you set Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 x or later as the default browser Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools 21 Notes 1 You must install the optional Java Virtual Machine VM support to access a client system running UM Services 2 If you
237. n the IBM Director Management Server and Console When installed this function appears in the Tasks column with the name Diagnostics To use Real time diagnostics 1 From the IBM Director Console in the Tasks column select Diagnostics Then drag and drop Diagnostics onto the system that you want to diagnose In the Component field select the component to test In the Action field select the action for the component Click Start Action The action results are displayed in the Results window You can then highlight the text right click the mouse and copy and paste the results into a text editor op ah Some results might require that you take specific action For details on correcting a failed device consult the documentation that comes with the NAS appliance You can also run all tests by selecting All Components for the Component and All Non Destructive Actions for the Action Depending on the number and size of hard disks present this full test suite can take considerable time to complete Even though this is a nondisruptive diagnosis testing might impact performance Rack Manager and inventory enhancements The Rack Manager task has been updated to include all of the IBM NAS components A new component category NAS includes all of the IBM NAS appliance engines All IBM NAS appliances are automatically discovered by the Rack Manager task for drag and drop rack construction The following component categories have been u
238. n log files It can be used for backing up either the Model 326 operating system or user data If you want to back up selected folders you can use NT Backup without the NAS Backup Assistant which backs up an entire volume However if you use NT Backup it is recommended that you select and back up the copy of the files in a previous persistent image rather than the original data itself When selecting the files for the NT Backup operation you must select the specific folders in the persistent image If you select the entire group of persistent images the files in those images will not be selected for backup For more information about persistent images see Because NAS Backup Assistant only creates and launches scripts and is not a comprehensive backup application it does not support interactive error messages To check status of jobs you must either view the Backup Logs or view the Windows Event Viewer You invoke the NAS Backup Assistant by clicking the IBM NAS Admin desktop icon to open the IBM NAS Administration console Select Backup and Restore to expand that tree then select IBM NAS Backup Assistant Once you select this option a logon prompt appears Log on as a user who has backup operator privileges an Administrator or backup Administrator If a logon prompt does not appear right click the IBM NAS Backup Assistant link and select refresh Once you log on the main panel appears The four tabs on the main panel are B
239. nce Table 16 ServeRAID 4Lx problems and actions continued Problem Action FFFF or other code not listed 1 Follow indications in the POST ISPR SCSI cable SCSI backplane Hard drive Check the ServeRAID 4Lx controller ARON Testing the ServeRAID 4Lx adapter You can run all diagnostic operations for the ServeRAID adapters through the IBM ServeRAID Configuration software in the Advanced Functions option You can run subsystem diagnostics through the system diagnostics Note Before running any test back up the current disk array configuration using the ServeRAID diagnostics test program Always keep a current backup of the ServeRAID configuration information Dynamic changes might occur in the configuration due to hot spare replacement The IBM PC ServeRAID Adapter diagnostics test program runs from diskette independent of the operating system You can obtain a copy from the ServerGuide Diskette Factory or download the image from the IBM Web site To back up the ServeRAID configuration 1 From the Main Menu select Advanced Functions 2 Select Backup IPS ServeRaid Config Use the ServeRAID Subsystem Diagnostic program to test the PC ServeRAID Adapter and the devices connected to it To test the ServeRAID subsystem 1 Start the ServeRAlD Configuration Utility program 2 Select Advanced Functions from the Main Menu and press Enter 3 Select IBM ServeRAID Subsystem Diagnostic from the next menu and
240. ne 70 Model 326 User s Reference Microsoft Cluster Server which controls the disk resource failover waits a certain period called the pending timeout for the disk to come online During the loading phase the disk resource is shown as being in Online Pending state With a default value of 180 seconds 3 minutes for the pending timeout this time interval might be exceeded because of the time it takes to load the persistent images on the volume If this occurs the delay might cause Cluster Server to mark the disk as Failed and to not be available to either Model 326 node Other dependent resources IP addresses network names file shares and so on might also fail For this reason it is recommended that you increase the pending timeout value for all clustered resources to 1200 seconds 20 minutes To do this open Cluster Administrator select Resources from the left pane to display all clustered resources in the right pane and then for each resource listed in the right pane 1 Right click the resource name and select Properties 2 Select the Advanced tab 3 Change the Pending timeout value to 1200 seconds 4 Click Apply then click OK PSM imposes a limit of 1 terabyte TB of cached data across all volumes on the Model 326 For this reason you should ensure that the total configured size of all cache files on the Model 326 is not greater than 1 TB You can do this by accessing Persistent Storage Manager then going to
241. ne failover for each volume Manually fail over cluster resources Set up cluster resource balancing by assigning preferred node e Diagnose system problems Check Ethernet adapters using PROSet II and 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter using SLICuser Check Fibre Channel card using FAStT MSJ Check RAID subsystem using Storage Manager Disaster Recovery Restores a previously saved PSM image of the system partition to a failed machine This restores all configuration information on the failed node You create the recovery boot diskette from the PSM tools in the Windows for 2000 NAS GUI Recovery CD Set Integrated System Management Processor ISMP configuration program Reinstalls the software to the original state as shipped on the machine however does not restore configuration information configuration changes you applied to the original shipped configuration are lost You must first boot with the Recovery Enablement Diskette and then reboot with the Recovery CD To create the Recovery Enablement Diskette run enablement_disk_x y exe where x y are the version number of the disk located on the Supplementary CD You will be prompted to insert a blank disk into drive a Configures the ISMP that is integrated on the engine planar board Remote Supervisor Adapter RSA configuration program Configures the optional RSA 10 Model 326 User s Reference Terminal Services Client The Terminal Ser
242. ned Externally Configured Appliances group Appliances configured without the IAACU that meet the rules for any existing Family are automatically added to the matching Family To add an Orphaned Externally configured Appliance to an appropriate Family that was created after the orphaned appliance was discovered right click the orphaned appliance and select Adopt by First Matching Family For more information see Note The IAACU does not change manually configured network settings of discovered appliances If the manually configured IP and Subnet addresses fit an existing Family the IAACU will place that appliance into that Family but does not change any other settings Such as host name DNS or gateway addresses e Conflicting Network Addresses Any discovered appliance that has the same IP address as a previously discovered appliance will be listed in the Conflicting Network Addresses group Creating a Family To create a Family 1 Select Create Family from the Family menu The IAACU Family Setup window opens 2 Select Appliance Family Rules The Appliance Family Rules determine what purpose an appliance must serve to be included in the Family Select one of the following values IBM TotalStorage NAS Appliances e IBM xSeries 130 and 135 3 Type the name that will be used for this Family in the Family Name field 4 Specify network resources to be used by members of the Family You can use the IAACU to assign network resource
243. nformation corrupted 2 System board 186 Security hardware control 1 Run Configuration Setup logic failed 2 System board 187 VPD serial number not set 1 Set serial number in Setup 2 System board 188 Bad EEPROM CRC 2 1 Run Configuration Setup 2 System board 189 An attempt was made to Run Configuration Setup enter the administrator access the appliance with password invalid passwords 201 Memory test error If the appliance does not have the latest level of BIOS installed update the BIOS to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again 1 DIMM 2 System board 229 Cache error 1 Run Configuration Setup 2 Processor 3 Second Processor 262 DRAM parity configuration 1 Battery ReaL 2 System board 289 DIMM has been disabled by 41 Run Configuration Setup if disabled by user de iu 2 Disable DIMM if not disabled by user 301 Keyboard or 1 Keyboard keyboard controller error 2 System board 303 Keyboard controller error 1 System board 2 Keyboard 602 Invalid diskette boot record 41 Diskette 2 Diskette drive 3 Cable 4 System board Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 141 Table 27 POST error messages continued Error Meaning FRU action code Symptom 604 Diskette drive error 1 Run Configuration Setup and diagnostics 2 Diskette Drive 3 Drive cable 4 System board 605 Unlock failure 1 Diskette drive 2 Drive cable 3 System board 662 Diskette drive conf
244. ng 10BASE T is the most widely deployed 10 Mbps Ethernet transmission protocol in use today 100BASE T The IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard that supports a transmission rate of 100 Mbps using 2 twisted pair wires Category 5 telephone wiring A access control In computer security the process of ensuring that the resources of a computer system can be accessed only by authorized users in authorized ways access control list ACL 1 In computer security a collection of all access rights for one object 2 In computer security a list associated with an object that identifies all the subjects that can access the object and their access rights for example a list associated with a file that identifies users who can access the file and identifies their access rights to that file accessory An IBM designation for a separately orderable part that a has no type number b is for purchase only and c does not receive normal IBM maintenance O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 203 active backup A type of bond group that provides high availability Two or more ports are combined under a logical bond group with one link active and the other link or links left idle The idle links are ready to take over in the event that the currently active link fails See bond group active dispatcher node The engine within a load balancing group that functions as the load balancer for that group Because each NAS engine can have multiple physical and bonded inter
245. nk Make sure the Save this password in your password list check box is not selected and then click OK Note To ensure system security change the Administrator password from password to something else After you do or if you create another user in the Administrator group in the future use your new username password combination instead of the default username password combination The first time you connect you might be prompted to install XML and Swing components Follow the on screen instructions to install these components and then close and restart Internet Explorer before you proceed You are now connected to the Model 326 through UM Services In addition to the standard UM Services functionality the appliance includes functionality for administering the appliance available from the Appliances tab in the left pane of the UM Services browser The default view in the right pane of the UM Services browser when you connect to the appliance is Windows 2000 for NAS The other selectable view in the Appliance tab is Windows 2000 Terminal Services which displays a Terminal Services Web Connection page 22 Model 326 User s Reference 3 To start Windows 2000 for NAS click Administer this server appliance in the right pane of the UM Services browser To connect to the Model 326 and manage it as though you were running Terminal Services Client from the desktop select Terminal Services in the Appliance tab of the UM Services br
246. nnect a serial cable that shipped with the hub or switch not null modem between the serial port on the hub switch and COM1 of the system Open a HyperTerminal Session from the managing system Choose a name for the session On the Connect to window change to COM1 Set properties as follows Bits second 9600 Data bits 8 156 Model 326 Users Reference Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None Then click OK 6 Connect and then press Enter on the terminal screen 7 At the Admin gt prompt type ipAddrSet and press Enter 8 Type in an IP address 9 Type in a subnet mask 10 Enter the Fibre Channel IP address if needed and press Enter If not needed press Enter 11 Enter Fibre Channel subnet mask if needed and press Enter If not needed press Enter 12 Enter Gateway Address IP address if needed and press Enter If not needed press Enter 13 After you have entered all the information you are prompted to either apply changes immediately or to reboot You may do either but you will need to do either before you use the address 14 Connect the hub or switch to your Ethernet network Notes 1 It is possible that your machine will need a plug in to connect and manage the hub or switch through a browser The browser will identify the plug in and specify the location and steps to download the plug in If prompted for a user ID and password use admin and password For complete documentation refer to the IBM 35
247. not be mapped Services for UNIX supports a limited syntax in the passwd file In particular it seems to work best when the second field of each line the password field is filled in with a random 13 character string This need not have anything to do with the user s password so a string such as 0123456789012 is acceptable Some UNIX systems use shadow passwords and fill in this field with a meaningless token value such as x or and you will need to change this Finally if this is a clustered NAS copy these finished files to the same location on the other node Both nodes must have the same files for the system to failover properly Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 73 Creating Windows users and groups Using the IBM NAS Admin under the Users and Groups folder create Windows accounts corresponding to the UNIX accounts Note that a potential problem at this point is the practice in some UNIX systems of defining a UNIX group for each UNIX user using the same name as the user s name Windows does not allow the creation of groups with the same name as users To map these groups it is necessary to adopt a naming convention to apply to all these group names So for a user named alpha you might have a group named g_alpha on the NAS that corresponds to the group alpha in UNIX The naming convention must be selected so as not to conflict with any existing user or group names Introducing a naming convention cre
248. nt array of independent disks RAM See random access memory random access memory RAM A temporary storage location in which the central processing unit CPU stores and executes its processes Contrast with direct access storage device redundant array of independent disks RAID A method of protecting data loss due to disk failure based on the Redundant Array of Independent Disks specification published by the University of California in 1987 See device parity protection remote procedure call RPC A facility that a client uses to request the execution of a procedure call from a server This facility includes a library of procedures and an external data representation S Samba A UNIX implementation of CIFS that enables Windows networking file system protocol to communicate with UNIX operating systems SAN Storage area network SCSI See small computer system interface shared LAN ALAN in which the total bandwidth is shared among all nodes attached to the LAN segment shared RAM Shared memory provided by an adapter with onboard memory and requiring use of system CPU shielded twisted pair STP A cable medium consisting of a telephone wire wrapped in a metal sheath to eliminate external interference Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP In the Internet suite of protocols an application protocol for transferring mail among users in the Internet environment SMTP specifies the mail exchange sequences and message format It as
249. nt batteries call 1 800 772 2227 within the United States and 1 800 465 7999 or 1 800 465 6666 within Canada Outside the U S and Canada call your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative Note After you replace the battery you must reconfigure your appliance and reset the system date and time CAUTION A When replacing the lithium battery use only IBM Part Number 10L6432 or an equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer If your system has a module containing a lithium battery replace it only with the same module type made by the same manufacturer The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used handled or disposed of Do not Throw or immerse into water Heat to more than 100 C 212 F e Repair or disassemble In the U S call 1 800 IBM 4333 for information about battery disposal or dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations Note For translations of the safety notice refer to the multilingual Safety Information on the Documentation CD that came with the appliance To replace the battery 1 Review the information in the section Before you begin in the hardware installation guide that came with this appliance and any special handling and installation instructions supplied with the replacement battery 2 Turn off the appliance and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables and power cords then remove the appliance cover 3 Remo
250. nt window right click the unallocated area of Disk 0 and then click Create Partition c In the Create Partition wizard click Next and select Primary Partition Click Next and select D as the drive letter Click Next and select FAT32 as the file system and change the volume label to Maintenance f Click Finish to close the wizard The partition is then formatted When formatting is complete the status of the partition should appear as Healthy and the other properties should appear as e Name Maintenance e Drive letter D e File system FAT32 13 On the failed now recovered node Olov the procedures for configuring a oining node outlined in g 8 TE The recovered node rejoins the cluster that already contains the other operational node You must reconfigure any cluster resource balancing you had set up prior to recovery so that the recovered node will once again be the preferred owner of any resources for which it had been the preferred owner prior to the recovery See balancing on page 42 for more details on configuring resource balancing Using the Supplementary CD The Supplementary CD contains documentation and copies of key software applications that are preinstalled on the Model 326 includes the names of the directories found on the Supplementary CD and a description of the contents of the directory Chapter 9 Using the Recovery and Supplementary CDs 125 Table 23 Supplementary CD directories Dir
251. ny persistent images for that drive to build the cache file You may then delete the persistent image that you just created if you do not need to keep it After the creation of the first persistent image on a volume future persistent images on that volume will complete faster e The default size of the cache file per drive is 15 percent of the total drive capacity In most cases that should be sufficient However it is possible that it will not be enough to maintain the number of persistent images you want to keep 68 Model 326 User s Reference concurrently on the drive given the amount of file write activity to the drive PSM automatically takes action to prevent the cache file from overflowing because if that occurred PSM would be forced to automatically delete all persistent images on the drive when it cannot keep track of changes made to the drive it cannot maintain a valid persistent image PSM takes the following actions as the cache file usage approaches a full condition When the cache file usage exceeds the warning threshold configured in the PSM Volumes panel for the drive the default value is 80 percent PSM generates a warning message to the system event log viewable through the Windows 2000 Event Viewer in the IBM NAS Admin console and to the alert log in the Microsoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage user interface The name of the source for the message is psman5 Additionally while the cache fil
252. o navigate between test categories using the Next Cat and Prev Cat buttons All other functions provided by mouse selectable buttons are also available using the function keys d You can test the USB keyboard by using the regular keyboard test The regular mouse test can test a USB mouse Also you can run the USB hub test only if there are no USB devices attached e You can view Model 326 engine configuration information such as system configuration memory contents interrupt request IRQ use direct memory access DMA use device drivers and so on by selecting Hardware Info from the top of the screen f You cannot use the diagnostics program to test adapters Use the procedure outlined in When the tests have completed you can view the Test Log by selecting Utility from the top of the screen If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists during normal Model 326 operations a software error might be the cause If you suspect a software problem refer to the information that comes with the software package Appendix D Engine POST and diagnostic program messages 147 Viewing the test log The test log will not contain any information until after the diagnostic program has run Note If you already are running the diagnostic programs begin with Step H To view the test log 1 Ensure a monitor keyboard and mouse is connected to the Model 326 2 Power on the Model 326 engine and watch the screen If the Mod
253. o which port by transmitting frames As such if any pair of ports are not properly connected for various reasons improperly seated GBICs or cables bad GBICs or cables or improper connection of SWL to LWL and so on the test ends with the following message in the Telnet shell One or more ports is not active please double check fibres on all ports singlePortAlso mode The singlePortAlso mode is specified by executing the crossPortTest command with the second argument a value of 1 as follows sw admin gt crossPortTest 0 1 In this mode crossPortTest allows a port to be cable loopbacked to itself port M is connected to port M in addition to the cross connection supported port M is connected to port N This can be used to isolate bad ports GBIC mode Note Ensure that you reset GBIC mode before returning the hub to normal operation The GBIC mode is activated by executing the following command prior to executing the crossPortTest command sw admin gt setGbicMode 1 Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub 161 diagClearError When activated only ports with a GBIC or imbedded optics present are included in the crossPortTest list of ports to test For example if GBIC mode is activated e Ports 0 6 which have imbedded optics are always included in the testing e Port 7 is only included if a GBIC is plugged into Port 7 The state of the GBIC mode is saved in flash It stays activa
254. of this Family Use Serial Number Uses the serial number of the discovered appliance as a host name for the appliance Use Prefix Name Uses a user specified prefix along with an incremental number for each appliance for the host name of each appliance that is a member of this Family Type the prefix in the Host Name Prefix field 6 Click Finish to save this Family Removing Appliances from Families Use the Remove Appliance function to delete an appliance from the IAACU Console database and view panel Removing an appliance that is no longer in use allows the IP address that was assigned to the appliance to be allocated to another appliance You can also remove an appliance from a family and then rescan the network to add it to an appropriate Family that appears higher in the Tree View pane To remove an appliance right click the appliance and then select Remove Appliance from the pop up menu e If the IAACU cannot communicate with the selected appliance because for example it has been removed from the network or has failed the appliance is removed immediately e If the IAACU can communicate with the selected appliance you are prompted to confirm removal of the appliance before the appliance removal task is completed This helps prevent accidental removal of an active and functional appliance Using the Adopt by First Matching Family function Use this function to Add an Orphaned Externally Configured Appliance to an ap
255. ogical drive configuration for each storage subsystem connected to the cluster Note If you add or delete any other logical drives you must make them known to the other node in a cluster configuration Creating arrays and LUNs under the Storage Manager Application Note lt takes approximately 48 minutes per 50 GB for drives to initialize When you begin this procedure all nonallocated drives appear as Unconfigured Capacity in one large drive pool showing the total unconfigured capacity To create arrays and LUNs 1 Right click Unconfigured Capacity 32 Model 326 User s Reference 2 Select Create Array 3 Select either Automatic or Manual depending on your requirements Automatic mode chooses drives across different enclosures connected to that particular storage controller which spreads the array bandwidth and increases redundancy Note In this procedure it is recommended that the arrays are not RAID 0 If you are using the preset factory configuration the first logical drive is configured as the 500 MB Quorum drive Configure the second logical drive with the remainder of the space on the array If you are creating a customized configuration on the 5191 RAID Storage Controller ensure that you create a 500 MB Quorum drive on a RAID 5 array Create another logical drive using the remaining space on that RAID 5 array Create additional arrays using the rest of the unconfigured capacity until all of the arrays are created
256. ol TCP IP Click Properties select Use the following IP address and enter the addresses for the IP subnet mask default gateway and preferred DNS server If needed configure the DNS WINS HOSTS or whichever method you will be using for names resolution To view this information click the Advanced button on the Properties window Click OK on each panel to return to the Properties window eo2oo0p 38 Model 326 User s Reference Do not place paired adapters on the same IP network unless you are going to use adapter teaming or adapter load balancing Verifying network connectivity and names resolution Verify network connectivity and names resolution after you have installed clustering on the joining node To verify that the private and public networks are communicating properly 1 Click Start gt Run type cmd in the text box and click OK to bring up an MS DOS prompt 2 Type ping ipaddress where ipaddress is the IP address for the corresponding network adapter in the other node and press Enter For example assume that the IP addresses are set as follows Table 3 Example of local area connection names and network adapter IP addresses Node Local area connection name Network adapter IP address 1 Private 10 1 1 1 1 Public 1 192 168 1 12 1 Public 2 192 168 2 12 2 Private 10 1 1 2 2 Public 1 192 168 1 13 2 Public 2 192 168 2 13 In this example you would type ping 192 168 1
257. on Setup failures using the default 2 Battery configuration 3 System board 4 Processor 101 102 System and processor error System board 106 System and processor error System board 111 Channel check error 1 Failing ISA Adapter 2 DIMM 3 System board 114 Adapter read only memory 1 Failing Adapter ibi 2 Run Diagnostics 129 Internal cache error 1 Processor 2 Optional processor if installed 151 Real time clock error 1 Run Diagnostics 2 Battery 3 System board 161 Real time clock battery error 1 Run Configuration Setup 2 Battery 3 System board 162 Device Configuration error 1 Run Configuration Setup Note Be sure to load the default settings and any additional settings then save the configuration 2 Battery 3 Failing Device 4 System board 163 Real time clock error 1 Run Configuration Setup 2 Battery 3 System board 164 Memory configuration 1 Run Configuration Setup changed 2 DIMM 175 Hardware error System board 140 Model 326 User s Reference Table 27 POST error messages continued Error Meaning FRU action code Symptom 176 Computer cover or cable 1 Run Configuration Setup cover was removed without a 2 System board key being used 3 C2 Security Switch 177 178 Security hardware error 1 Run Configuration Setup 2 System board 184 Power on password 1 Run Configuration Setup corrupted 2 System board 185 Drive startup sequence 1 Run Configuration Setup i
258. on of data on a network resulting from the magnetism created by a current of electricity Electronic Industries Association ElA An organization of electronics manufacturers that advances the technological growth of the industry represents the views of its members and develops industry standards Electronic Industries Association EIA unit A unit of measure equal to 4 45 cm 1 75 in electrostatic discharge ESD An undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage equipment and degrade electrical circuitry EMC Electromagnetic compatibility emulate To imitate one system with another primarily by hardware so that the imitating system accepts the same data executes the same programs and achieves the same results as the imitated system A emulated LAN ELAN A specific implementation of a virtual LAN as it relates to LAN Emulation in ATM networks An ELAN consists of one or more LAN Emulation clients LECs that share the same LAN Emulation Server and Broadcast and Unknown Server LES BUS LECs gain membership in an ELAN based on configurable policies Like devices on traditional LANs each ELAN member has a MAC address and can use the LES BUS to send unicast and broadcast packets to other members based on MAC addresses emulation 1 The use of a data processing system to imitate another data processing system so that the imitating system accepts the same data executes the same programs and achieves the same resul
259. ore options in configuring Ethernet connections e More options for tape backup The Model 326 is a two node appliance server and features e One Rack 36U with two Power Distribution Units e Two engines IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ each with Dual 1 133 GHz processors 1 GB memory Two redundant 270 watt power supplies Fibre Channel adapter Four high performance PCI adapter slots for plugging in optional 10 100 and Gigabit Ethernet Fibre Channel and management adapters Communication between the two engines takes place through an integrated 10 100 Mbps Ethernet port on each engine s planar board e Two Fibre Channel hubs e One Fibre Channel RAID storage controller with a minimum of three and up to ten 36 4 or 73 4 GB hot swappable hard disk drives e Optional storage An additional RAID storage controller Maximum of seven storage expansion units each populated with three to ten 36 4 or 73 4 GB hot swappable hard disk drives e A1GB memory upgrade e Optional adapters Single port 10 100 Ethernet adapter Quad port 10 100 Ethernet adapter Gigabit Ethernet adapter ServeRAID 4Lx adapter Remote Supervisor Adapter Dual port Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapter Copyright IBM Corp 2002 1 In addition the Model 326 provides clustering and failover protection with its two nodes This high availability design helps protect against appliance failure and increa
260. ot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz RSA Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID RSA SCSI HVD Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet SCSI LVD SE FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI Ethernet FC1 FC1 LVD SE RSA Ethernet SCSI HVD FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI HVD Ethernet FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet ServeRAID FC2 FC1 RSA ServeRAID Ethernet FC1 FC2 RSA Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 RSA ServeRAID Ethernet FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA Ethernet FC1 FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC2 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID FC2 RSA ServeRAID SCSI SE Gigabit FC2 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC2 FC2 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 RSA ServeRAID SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 ServeRAID RSA ServeRAID SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 RSA SCSI SE PRO 1
261. ot include the nFrames parameter specifying the number of frames when you issue the command the loopback test runs continuously until you press Enter again If the test does not find an error there is no output You can choose to continue the test view statistics or view an error log Checks CPU RAM memory This test validates proper memory function Forces crossPortTest or spinSilk to limit its testing to only those ports whose GBICs or imbedded optics are detected present Entering the command with the 1 parameter enables GBIC mode Entering the command with the O parameter disables GBIC mode Verifies the intended functional operation of the hub by sending frames from the transmitter of each port through the GBIC the imbedded optics and external cable and back to another port s receiver at the full hardware speed of 1 GB per second It exercises the entire path of the hub Because the CPU is not comparing data on each frame as with the other two frame tests the DIAG DATA error is never reported during spinSilk However the other error messages defined for crossPortTest and their corresponding probable causes and actions are applicable to spinSilk The operation of spinSilk is affected by the state of the GBIC mode The GBIC mode is activated by executing the following command prior to executing the spinSilk command sw admin gt setGbicMode 1 When activated only ports with a GBIC or embedded optics present are included in
262. other ASIC asic asic test e Bad parity can be detected and flagged in the error register and interrupt posted parity error test e Buffer number error can be detected and flagged in the error register and interrupt posted buffer number error test e Chip number error can be detected and flagged in the error register and interrupt posted chip number error test cmemRetentionTest cmiTest crossPortTest 160 Model 326 User s Reference Verifies that Data written into the SRAMs that make up the central memory are retained Data bits do not drop when read after some amount of delay since the write Verifies that control messages can be correctly sent from any ASIC to any ASIC It also tests that the checksum check is OK Verifies the intended functional operation of the hub The crossPortTest command sends frames from each port s transmitter using the GBIG the imbedded optics and the external cable back to another port s receiver lt exercises the entire path of the hub The command has two parameters e nFrames specifies the number of frames to run If you omit this parameter the test runs until you press Enter e Oor 7 specifies whether a single port looped back to itself is allowed 0 the default does not allow this 7 does allow this A port can be connected to any port in the same hub provided the connection is of the same technology For example SWL ports are connected to SWL ports and LWL ports are connec
263. oup number GID fields and then click New When you have finished adding groups click Apply Click Users On the Users page you must add all of the UNIX users who will be accessing and storing files on the Model 326 through an NFS share For each user you need to know the Windows user name the UNIX user name the primary group and the user ID UID number This information can be found in the etc passwd and etc group files on most UNIX systems As an example on an AIX system in the following line from an etc passwd file the fields are separated by a colon The first field user1 is the user name the third field 3135 is the UID and the fourth field 1 is the GID of the user s primary group This will correspond to a line in the etc group file where you can find the primary group name corresponding to the GID userl 3135 1 User 1 home userl bin ksh To add a user click New enter the required information and then click OK When you finish adding users click Apply In the left pane click User Name Mapping In the right pane select Personal Computer Network File System PCNFS In the Password file path and name field type c winnt system32 drivers etc passwad In the Group file path and name field type c winnt system32 drivers etc group Click Apply Click Maps On the Maps page you can configure simple maps or advanced maps Configure simple maps if the Windows user name and UNIX user name i
264. oup to the preferred owner if defined 42 Model 326 User s Reference In allowing failback of groups there is a slight delay in the resources moving from one node to the other The group can also be instructed to allow failback when the preferred node becomes available or to failback during specific off peak usage hours Each resource under each disk group has individual resource properties The properties range from restart properties polling intervals to check if a resource is operational to a timeout to return to an online state The default settings for these properties are selected from average conditions and moderate daily use Creating users The creation of users is performed through normal procedures Users do not need to be created exclusively for use on the cluster resources You must define properties of the resources for users to access the resources within the domain policies All user accessible cluster resources have the same properties as standard Microsoft Windows resources and should be set up following the same policies Note If your storage will be accessed by UNIX or UNIX based clients and servers continue with Defining UNIX users and groups The Model 326 is on a Windows domain and inherits those Windows users eliminating the need to define local Windows users and groups Also shares are created in the clustering setup Defining UNIX users and groups This section describes how to set up UNIX users and
265. owser and then follow the instructions for connecting to ihe Model 326 using Launching UM Services from the configuration utility You can use the IAACU to launch UM Services on the Model 326 appliances Note The selected appliance must be running Universal Manageability UM Services as a UM Services client Also the systems management console the system that is running the IAACU Console must use a Web browser that is supported for use with UM Services If you have not used UM Services from this system you must install several plug ins before proceeding To use the IAACU Console to start UM Services on an appliance 1 Click the appliance in the IAACU Console Tree View Pane When you select the appliance from the tree view information about the selected appliance appears in the Information Pane 2 Click the Start Web Based Management button Your default Web browser starts loading the UM Services browser automatically 3 Log in to the UM Services browser Refer to Step B on page 22 for login instructions For more information on using UM Services to manage your appliances see the Universal Manageability Services User s Guide included on the Documentation CD that came with the appliance Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage While you can perform most administrative tasks using Windows 2000 for NAS you must use Terminal Services Client for some advanced tasks See 2 for more information Task categories avai
266. pdated to include the new IBM NAS appliance components Racks Includes the new component NAS Rack Model 36U Storage Includes these new components e NAS Storage Expansion Unit Model ORU e NAS Storage Expansion Unit Model 1RU Fibre Channel Includes these new components e NAS 8 port Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU e NAS Raid Storage Controller Model EXP e NAS Raid Storage Controller Model ORU e NAS Raid Storage Controller Model 2RU e NAS Raid Storage Controller Model EXU NAS Is a new component category that includes these components NAS 100 Engine Model R12 Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 57 e NAS 100 Engine Model R18 NAS 200 Engine Model 200 e NAS 200 Engine Model 201 NAS 200 Engine Model 225 NAS 200 Engine Model 226 e NAS 200i Engine Model 100 e NAS 200i Engine Model 110 e NAS 300 Engine Model 5RZ e NAS 300 Engine Model 6RZ e NAS 300G Engine Model 5RY e NAS 300G Engine Model 6RY Dynamic NAS groups Dynamic NAS groups are an IBM Director Management Server enhancement made specifically for IBM NAS appliances You must install this enhancement on the IBM Director Management Server as well as all IBM Director Consoles You can add dynamic NAS groups to the IBM Director Server and Consoles by downloading the InstallShield extension from the IBM Web site and invoking the executable file This will create a new Group on all consoles that represent IBM NAS appliances in the managed network D
267. perties Private panel Rename the connection to Private Configuring the public local area connection Note While the public network adapter s IP address can be automatically obtained if a DHCP server is available this is not recommended for cluster nodes It is strongly recommended that you set static IP addresses for all network adapters in the cluster If IP addresses are obtained through DHCP access to cluster nodes could become unavailable if the DHCP server goes down To configure each public local area connection perform the following steps on each node 1 2 Right click My Network Places then click Properties Select a Local Area Connection When you perform this step the connection that uses the IBM 10 100 Adapter is the private connection The other active connection is the public connection Use that other active connection for this step and the next step To rename the connection click Rename and then type for example Public 1 and press Enter Ensure that local area connection names are unique When you perform these renaming steps for the joining node ensure that the local area connection name for each physically connected network is identical on each server See rare a further example Use the networking information in Table 1 on page 7 to enter the networking addresses Right click My Network Places Click Properties Right click the Public icon and then click Properties Select Internet Protoc
268. press Enter 4 Select the diagnostic test to run and press Enter Descriptions of the diagnostic tests available include Run Adapter Self tests Tests the PC ServeRAID Adapter Restart the server after the self test completes SCSI Device Self test Runs diagnostic tests on the SCSI devices attached to the PC ServeRAlD Adapter Troubleshooting the SCSI HVD 3570 adapter You can use the troubleshooting chart in Table 17 on page 108 to find solutions to the HVD adapter problems that have definite symptoms Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 107 Table 17 SCSI HVD 3570 adapter troubleshooting chart SCSI HVD 3570 adapter Suggested action problem The adapter is not operating 41 Ensure the adapter is seated correctly ee 2 Ensure that all of the SCSI devices are on 3 Ensure that all bus and power cables are connected correctly 4 Ensure that the host adapter and all SCSI devices have unique SCSI IDs 5 Ensure that the pin 1 orientation is maintained throughout the bus 6 Replace the adapter Adapter stops operating 1 Run the diagnostics POSE Our apparent 2 Reseat the adapter in its slot or use a different slot if necessary cause 3 The network driver files might be corrupt or missing Remove and then reinstall the drivers BIOS startup messages P 9 Device connected but not ready Set the Send Start Unit Command to Yes for the host adapter Start unit request failed Set the Send Start Unit Command to No for
269. propriate Family Appliances that have been configured without using the IAACU tool and that do not meet the rules for any existing Family are automatically added to the Orphaned Externally Configured Appliances group If after the orphaned appliance is discovered you create a Family that is appropriate for the orphaned appliance right click the orphaned appliance and select Adopt by First Matching Family to move the appliance from the Orphaned Externally Configured Appliances group to the newly created Family e Move an appliance from one Family to another appropriate Family that occurs higher in the list of previously defined Families If there is more than one appropriate Family for a newly discovered appliance it automatically appears in Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools 19 the first appropriate Family in the list of Families If you want to move a discovered appliance from one appropriate Family to another appropriate Family 1 2 20 Model 326 User s Reference Right click the Family that you want the appliance moved to Select Move Up in List to move the selected Family up in the list of families Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the Family that you want to add the appliance to appears above the Family that currently contains the appliance Right click the appliance that you want to move to another Family and then select Adopt by First Matching Family Universal Manageability Services Universal Manageability Ser
270. quirements 21 using 21 Universal Manageability Services 11 Universal Manageability Services UM Services accessing 26 UNIX users and groups defining 43 W warranty and repair 133 Web sites 129 Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage Web based interface 11 administrative tasks 23 online help 23 Windows Terminal Services 25 Index 225 226 Model 326 User s Reference Printed in the United States of America on recycled paper containing 10 recovered post consumer fiber GA27 4276 02
271. r cable This is typically the result of running a wrap test The tests should be run again after swapping cables and GBICs to determine cause It is unlikely that the system board is at fault as most system board failures cause a POST failure Diagnostic error message formats If any port fails during a diagnostic test it is marked BAD in the status display To retest a port that has been marked BAD clear the port and set to OK using the diagClearError port command This command clears the port status only and does not clear the logs or change the port s condition The diagClearError port command should only be used during diagnostic procedures to reset a bad port for retest Some messages contain the following abbreviations e sb Should be er Bits in error Note If you run the portStatsShow command or the diagShow command before running a test errors may appear as a result of the normal synchronization process These errors should be addressed if the number of errors found increases when running the portStatsShow command again Error message tables Table 31 on page 164 shows the diagnostic error messages their descriptions and probable causes Each message has an error number ERR xxxx associated with it Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub 165 Table 31 shows the system error messages their descriptions and probable CAUSES Table 31 Hub diagnostic error messages
272. r configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 Ethernet SCSI SE ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID SCSI SE FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE Ethernet SCSI Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 LVD SE FC2 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 LVD SE FC2 LVD SE Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 HVD FC2 Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE Ethernet SCSI Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit Gigabit SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 LVD SE FC1 LVD SE Ethernet Gigabit PRO 1000 SCSI HVD Ethernet SCSI HVD PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 Ethernet PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI Ethernet SCSI PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 LVD SE FC1 LVD SE Ethernet PRO 100
273. r cords from the the Remote Supervisor unit wait 30 seconds reconnect and retry Adapter has failed 4 Remote Supervisor Adapter if installed 5 System board 166 201 001 System Management failed 1 tf installed reseat I2C cable between Remote I2C Bus Error s Supervisor Adapter in PCI slot 1 J44 and system ISMP indicates I2C errors on opara bus 0 Potential FRUs 2 Reseat memory DIMMs Memory DIMMs system 3 Memory DIMMS board 4 System board 166 201 002 System Management failed 41 Reseat I2C cable between operator information panel 12C Bus Error s and system board J39 ISMP indicates 12C errors on 2 Operator information panel bus 2 Potential FRUs LED 3 System board front panel system board 166 201 003 System Management failed I2C Bus Error s ISMP indicates I2C errors on bus 3 Potential FRUs power backplane system board Reseat cables between power backplane and system board Operator information panel System board 166 201 004 System Management failed 1 If installed reseat I2C cable between IBM Netfinity 12C Bus Error s 3 Pack Ultra160 Hot Swap Expansion Kit and DASD ISMP indicates 12C errors on backplane and DASD I2C on system board JO bus 4 Potential FRUs DASD 2 System board backplane system boara 166 201 005 System Management failed 1 Reseat Memory DIMMs I2C Bus Error s 2 Reseat processors ISMP indicates I2C errors on 3 Memory DIMMs de EE 5 a
274. r engine to create the same schedule that you created on the original engine with all of the same parameters start time frequency number to keep and so on 4 Use the Cluster Administrator to move the disk group that contains the volume back to the original engine Volume restore of the system volume C drive is not supported If you attempt to restore a persistent image containing the system volume the restore operation will not take place e Volume restore of a data volume might require a reboot of the node You will be notified by the Restore Persistent Images panel whether a reboot is required after a restore operation is initiated e When you restart the Model 326 restart in this case means that with both nodes down the node that was shut down last is restarted first so that it initially owns all of the shared data volumes Persistent Storage Manager PSM takes two actions 1 Loading 2 Mapping During loading PSM loads existing persistent images from the cache files on each of the volumes The loading time depends on the amount of cache data there is to read Cached data is used by PSM to maintain the persistent images and the more cache data there is the longer it takes to load the persistent images and thus the longer it might take the Model 326 to become fully operational after a restart During mapping PSM makes the loaded persistent images accessible through the file system by mounting each of them as a
275. rage management software to diagnose storage controller problems You can use lable 21 on page 114 to find solutions to problems that have definite symptoms Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 113 Table 21 Storage controller troubleshooting Problem indicator Component Possible cause Possible solutions Amber LED on Drive CRU Drive has failed Replace the drive that has failed Fan CRU Fan failure Replace the fan that has failed RAID controller Fault LED RAID controller has failed If the RAID controller Fault LED is on replace the RAID controller Expansion port GBIC port empty No corrective action is bypass LED needed if the system is properly configured Fibre Channel cable No corrective action is is not attached to needed the expansion unit No incoming signal 1 Reattach the GBIC detected and Fibre Channel cables 2 Replace input and output GBIC or cables as necessary Front panel General system Indicates that a Fault error LED somewhere on the storage controller has turned on Check for amber LEDs on CRUS Amber LED is on and green LED off Power supply CRU Power switch is turned off or AC power failure Turn on all power supply power switches Amber and green LEDs on Power supply CRU Power supply failure Replace the failed power supply CRU All green LEDs off All CRUs Subsystem power is off AC power failure Check that all storag
276. rd are attached you will hear one short beep Any other series of beeps indicates a problem and an error message appears on your screen See for more information Notes 1 If you have set a power on password or administrator password set you must type the password and press Enter when prompted before POST will continue 2 A single problem might cause several error messages When this occurs work to correct the cause of the first error message After you correct the cause of the first error message the other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run the test POST beep code descriptions Beep codes are sounded in a series of beeps For example a 1 2 4 beep code sounds like one beep a pause two consecutive beeps another pause and four more consecutive beeps The possible types of beep codes that your appliance might emit include the following No beeps If no beep occurs after your appliance completes POST that is after the system POST complete OK light on the operator information panel is illuminated call for service Continuous beep The recovery enablement disk has booted your startup boot microprocessor has failed or your system board or speaker subsystem might contain a failing component If the system continues through POST with no errors call for service If no video appears the startup processor has failed replace the startup processor One short beep When a monitor and keyboard i
277. re e Memory error e Microprocessor failure e PCI bus error e VRM failure e Planar SCSI failure for system disk or internal tape drive if any Remote status includes information on power supply voltages voltage regulator module VRM readings temperatures of system components system power status power on hours fan status and system state 2 A third might be referred to in some of the documentation that came with your system but that adapter is not used in the Model 326 78 Model 326 User s Reference Table 6 ISMP compared to the RSA Feature ISMP RSA Location On planar board Separate PCI adapter option Light path diagnostics Remotely reports on Remotely reports on LED status of engine Remotely reports on Remotely reports on LED status of HDD in No No engine Remote update of Yes Yes system BIOS Remote update of ISMP No Yes BIOS Immediate remote power Yes Yes on off Controlled remote power No Yes on off using the OS Remote POST including No Yes all POST message ids Remote access to No Yes engine vital product data VPD and serial number Multiple login IDs No Yes TELNET interface over No Yes through a LAN IP connection Web browser interface No Yes over IP Forwarding of SNMP Yes to the RSA Yes through a LAN traps connection Automated server restart Yes Yes Remote Alerts No Yes Conf
278. re a node to be a member of more than one load balancing group locally administered address In a local area network an adapter address that the user can assign to override the universally administered address Contrast with universally administered address logical connection In a network devices that can communicate or work with one another because they share the same protocol logical drive A unit of virtual storage that is made available to the network through VLUNs and LUNs It is made up of one or more physical disks that are combined using RAID 0 1 1E 5 or 5E technology logical node Logical nodes exist and operate in the physical context of the primary devices There are different types of logical nodes and each is associated with a specific protocol stack loop A closed unidirectional signal path connecting input output devices to a system low smoke fire retardant zero halogen Describes materials that are not flammable and do not emit large amounts of smoke or toxic gasses when burnt low smoke zero halogen Describes materials that do not emit large amounts of smoke or toxic gasses when burnt LSFROH See low smoke fire retardant zero halogen LSOH See low smoke zero halogen M macro An instruction that causes the execution of a predefined sequence of instructions in the same source language main storage Program addressable storage from which instructions and other data can be loaded directly into register
279. received CI3FrmRx number of class 3 frames received DIAG TIMEOUT Err 266F For portLoopbackTest ASIC GBIC 2 306F 386F portLoopbackTest crossPortTest centralMemory Test DIAG XMIT Err 2271 2671 3071 3871 portLoopbackTest crossPortTest spinSilk camTest and crossPortTest port failed to receive frame within time out period For centralMemoryTest port failed to detect an interrupt within the timeout period Port failed to transmit frame module embedded optic or fiber cable failure ASIC failure 168 Model 326 User s Reference Table 32 Hub system error messages Message TEMP 4 FAILED LOG CRITICAL TEMP 5 FAILED LOG CRITICAL FANS 1 FAILED LOG WARNING FANS 2 FAILED LOG ERROR FANS 3 FAILED LOG CRITICAL FANS 4 FAILED LOG CRITICAL FANS 5 FAILED LOG CRITICAL FANS 6 FAILED LOG CRITICAL Description Managed hub overheated Probable cause Fan failure Action POWER 1 FAILED LOG CRITICAL Managed hub power failure Power supply failure 4 Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub 169 170 Model 326 User s Reference Appendix F Fast UTIL options This appendix provides detailed configuration information for advanced users who want to customize the configuration of the FASET Host Adapter and the connected devices However customizing the configuration
280. reinstall Internet Explorer after installing UM Services you must reapply the Microsoft VM update The UM Services client requires Microsoft VM Build 3165 or later Download the latest Microsoft VM from 3 If you install UM Services before you install MMC 1 1 or a later version you will not have an icon for Microsoft Management Console in the IBM Universal Manageability Services section of the Start menu Starting UM Services You can use IAACU or Terminal Services Client to configure the network setting remotely or you can attach a keyboard and mouse to your appliance and configure the Network settings using the Windows Control Panel After you have configured the network settings for your appliance you are ready to use UM Services To start UM Services 1 Start a Web browser and then in the Address or Location field of the browser type http ip_address 1411 where ip address is the IP address of the Model 326 and then press Enter Or type http computer name 1411 where computer name is the computer name of the Model 326 The computer name is predefined as IBM5195 xxxxxxx where xxxxxxx is the serial number located in the lower right corner of the bezel on the front of the appliance If you have changed the computer name from the predefined value use that name instead A user log in window appears 2 Type Administrator in the User Name field and type password in the Password field You can leave the Domain field bla
281. rocess as it is preserved in the backup image It is recommended that you now delete that persistent image as it is no longer needed On the Persistent Images panel select the persistent image named System Backup on drive C from the list of persistent images then click Delete then click OK on the Delete Persistent Image panel that appears If the restore was unsuccessful then you must use the Recovery CD as described Rebuilding the maintenance partition If this is a new hard drive or if the Maintenance D partition is unusable you must rebuild the Maintenance partition by performing the following steps 1 Start Disk Management on the node You can do this in one of two ways e Start a Terminal Services session to the node then click the IBM NAS Admin icon and then from the IBM NAS Administration console that appears select Computer Management then Disk Management Start a Windows 2000 for NAS user interface session to the node then select Disks and Volumes then select Disks and then provide your Administrator user name and password when prompted 2 Inthe Disk Management window right click the unallocated area of Disk 0 and then click Create Partition 3 In the Create Partition wizard click Next and select Primary Partition 4 Click Next and select D as the drive letter 5 Click Next and select FAT32 as the file system and change the drive label to Maintenance 6 Click Finish to close the wizard The part
282. rom the physical adapters If you delete the team the settings will return to the state prior to creating the team For complete help on adapter teaming from Intel PROSet II click Network Components and then select Help from the Help menu Note The integrated Ethernet controller on each Model 326 node is dedicated to the clustering interconnection between it and another node and cannot be used for teaming Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter The Quad Port 10 100 Ethernet adapter supports FEC and 802 3ad across the four ports on the adapter To configure it 1 Click on Control Panel 2 Select Network and Dial Up 3 Select Adapter 4 Select Properties 82 Model 326 User s Reference 5 Select Alacritech SLIC Team Configurator 6 Select New Team PRO 1000 XT Server adapter This adapter supports several teaming functions that you can configure using the PROSet configuration utility This adapter can also team with the integrated onboard 10 100 Intel Ethernet controller on the engine Specific teaming modes supported across multiple instances of this adapter are AFT ALB FEC GEC and 802 3ad Adding a second IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU This section gives details to follow when you have added a second RAID controller and need to add a new logical drive or create an array in the unconfigured storage Attention Before proceeding with these steps note the special considerations described in
283. rosoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage GUI 2 Microsoft Windows Terminal Services 2 mirroring RAID 84 Model 326 components IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU hub 85 IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ engine 85 IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller 85 IBM 5192 Storage Unit Model ORU storage unit 85 multiple 10 100 Ethernet adapters specifying 66 N names resolution 39 NAS Backup Assistant 59 NAS Setup Navigator tutorial 3 network binding order 39 network connection problems 96 network connectivity 39 network information worksheet 7 network setup 27 networking setup 37 networking setup completing 37 NFS clustered file shares creating 47 NFS Support 72 O online help accessing 23 P partnering setting up on the 3534 managed Fibre hubs 155 Persistent Images creating and preserving images of drives 61 disaster recovery 64 granting user access to persistent image files 68 PSM notes 68 PSM tasks 61 Persistent Storage Manager PSM 61 additional information 68 POST 3534 Fibre Managed Hub 112 beep codes 135 diagnostic programs 145 error logs 145 error messages 140 messages 140 POST ISPR error procedures 105 power on self test POST description 135 power problems 91 power supply LEDs 86 powering off and powering on the Model 326 when clustering is active 49 preloaded software Alacritech SLICuser 1 Columbia Data Products Persistent Storage Manager PSM 1
284. rs Enter the data for the following fields some of this data comes from ba fan peas e Administrator ID and password Note The ID and password are any valid user ID and password with administrator privileges on the domain Domain name Cluster name e Cluster IP address e Subnet mask e Quorum drive select from the pulldown menu After you enter the data click Continue Verify the information If it is correct click Yes to start the configuration Configuration takes a few minutes Model 326 User s Reference 7 If you are prompted to select a user account enter the user name and password for the domain account that you want the cluster service to use 8 If you are prompted to select a disk on which to store cluster checkpoint and log files do the following a Select the disk on which the Quorum is located for instance G if this is what you specified earlier and click Next b Click Finish at the Cluster Information panel 9 Cluster configuration completes for the first node 10 Power on the joining node You will join this node to the cluster 11 k 12 In the Cluster Setup wizard click Joining Node 13 In the First Node Information panel enter the name of the first node 14 If prompted to confirm the Administrator name and password enter that information and click Finish ng setup on page 3 1 You will see a message that configuration takes a few minutes When configuration completes the C
285. rs can use the switch to isolate erroneous frames generated on one segment so they do not traverse the switch onto another segment STP See shielded twisted pair SVN See switched virtual network switched LAN ALAN that has a dedicated connection for each user whereby the full bandwidth is available to the workstation switched virtual networks SVN A comprehensive approach for building and managing switched based networks It combines the virtues of LAN switching bridging routing ATM switching and other switched services synchronous data transfer A physical transfer of data to or from a device that has a predictable time relationship with the execution of an I O request synchronous transmission A method of transmission in which characters are synchronized by the transmission of initial sync characters and a common clock signal T tape device A collection of tape units that come from one model type and serial number such as all the LUNs of a tape library tape unit Atape drive or a robotics controller that is visible over a storage network A tape unit is a member of a single storage network of 1 to n fabrics but can have 1 to n equivalent paths target A collection of logical units that are directly addressable on the network The target corresponds to the server in a client server model TCP See Transmission Control Protocol TCP IP See Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Telnet In the Internet s
286. rs such as MAC and IP addresses e Network link status such as speed duplex mode and activity e Device driver level used for the adapter You can also use PROSet II to test the various Ethernet adapters for any problems with the adapter hardware cabling or network connections PROSet performs a loopback test on the 10 100 Ethernet and GB Ethernet PCI cards To access the PROSet ll vg go into Terminal Services For instructions on how steps 1 From the Start menu select Settings then Control Panel 2 Double click the INTEL PROSet II icon in the Control Panel 3 In the INTEL PROSet II utility select the Ethernet adapter to test Gigabit Ethernet PCI adapter or 10 100 Ethernet Adapter 4 Select the Diagnostics tab A list of available tests is displayed 5 Select Run Tests You can also select or deselect individual tests with the check boxes If an error is detected information about the error is displayed 6 Repeat Steps E through E for each Ethernet adapter installed For additional information about Intel PROSet refer to the online help that accompanies the utility Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 99 Troubleshooting the Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter Use Table 13 to find solutions to GB Ethernet adapter problems that have definite symptoms ge 99 for information on testing the adapter Table 13 Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter troubleshooting chart Gigabit adapter symptom Suggested Action No Link or TX
287. rt to the state and contents of a previous File Image Capture This function can be used to recover a corrupted file system File Transfer Protocol FTP In the Internet suite of protocols an application layer protocol that uses TCP and Telnet services to transfer bulk data files between machines or hosts FIR See File Image Restore firewall A logical barrier around systems in a network A firewall consists of hardware software and a security policy that control the access and flow of information between secure or trusted systems and nonsecure or untrusted systems fixed length record A record having the same length as all other records with which it is logically or physically associated flash memory A memory chip that holds its content without power but must be erased in fixed blocks rather than single bytes floating virtual connection FVC The ability to resume a virtual connection on a port other than the port connection on which the original virtual connection was established frame alignment error An error in a frame indicated by a frame check sequence FCS indicator When excessive or missing bits occur during the reception of a frame the frame is misaligned free disk A physical disk that is not assigned as a hot spare as a standby hot spare or to a logical drive FRU See field replaceable unit FTP See File Transfer Protocol FVC See floating virtual connection G gateway A device that acts as a router
288. rticularly for the initial setup of the network connectivity Alternatively you can attach a keyboard mouse display to each node of the Model 326 IAACU enables you to Set time date and initial network connectivity parameters Access to Windows 2000 for NAS GUI Terminal Services NAS Desktop and Universal Manageability Services Windows 2000 for NAS GUI Provides ease of use administration but not all the capabilities of Terminal Services and IBM NAS Administration The GUI enables you to e Configure networking connectivity private for clustering and public LAN connections Create and format logical drives e Join domains Set up access permissions and disk quotas for CIFS NFS HTTP FTP and Novell NetWare shares e Use Persistent Storage Manager IBM NAS desktop and IBM NAS Admin program through a Terminal Services session or a directly connected keyboard and monitor Provides in depth administration of all aspects of Model 326 Provides all of the Windows 2000 for NAS GUI functions above plus the ability to e Use NAS Backup Assistant or NT Backup and Restore wizard Learn detailed inventory information about hardware OS and so on using Universal Manageability Services RAID configuration through Storage Manager Create RAID arrays and LUNs Add additional RAID or storage enclosure after initial purchase Rename storage subsystems e Cluster administration Set up cluster Defi
289. run setup exe from the Disk1 subdirectory readme txt This is a text file that describes the contents of the Supplementary CD 126 Model 326 User s Reference Appendix A Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering the subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A For license inquiries regarding double byte DBCS information contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writing to IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2 31 Roppongi 3 chome Minato k
290. rveRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 LVD SE Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 Ethernet SCSI HVD ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 Ethernet ServeRAID FC1 FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID SCSI SE ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC2 FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 ServeRAID SCSI SE ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC2 FC2 Appendix H Adapter placement tables 199 Table 47 Five adapter configuration continued Configuration PCI Slot 1 PCI PCI PCI Slot 4 PCI Slot 5 32 bit Slot 2 64 Slot 3 64 64 bit 64 bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz bit 33 MHz 66 MHz 66 MHz SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI SE ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC2 ServeRAID FC2 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit ServeRAID SCSI SE ServeRAID Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 ServeRAID SCSI SE ServeRAID PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 SCSI SE ServeRAID PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 ServeRAID FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 SCSI SE Gigabit ServeRAID FC1 FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID Gigabit FC1 FC1 SCSI SE PRO 1000 ServeRAID FC1 SCSI SE ServeRAID PRO 1000 FC1 FC1 FC1 Gigabit Gigabit SCSI LVD SE SCSI ServeRAID Gig
291. s attached to the appliance one beep indicates that your appliance successfully completed POST POST detected no configuration or functional errors One beep also occurs after your appliance completes POST if you enter an incorrect power on password O Copyright IBM Corp 2002 135 Two short beeps POST encountered an error The Configuration Setup Utility program displays additional intonation follow the instructions that appear on the screen See 40 for descriptions of the text messages that mel appear Three short beeps A system memory error has occurred This combination occurs only if the video Basic Input Output System BIOS cannot display the error message Replace the failing memory module Repeating short beeps The system board might contain a failing component your keyboard might be defective or a key on the keyboard might be stuck Ensure that 1 Nothing is resting on the keyboard and pressing a key 2 No key is stuck 3 The keyboard cable is connected correctly to the keyboard and to the correct connector on the appliance Running the diagnostic tests can isolate the appliance component that failed but you must have your system serviced If the error message remains call for service Note If you just connected a new mouse or other pointing device turn off the appliance and disconnect that device Wait at least 5 seconds then turn on the appliance If the error message goes away replace the device One long
292. s for members of this Family or you can use a DHCP server to assign network resources e To use the IAACU to assign network resources clear the Use DHCP check box and fill in the following fields Min IP Address The lowest IP address in a range of IP addresses that can be assigned to an appliance that is a member of this Family Max IP Address The highest IP address in a range of IP addresses that can be assigned to an appliance that is a member of this Family Subnet Mask The subnet mask value that will be used by appliances that are members of this Family Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway that will be used by appliances that are members of this Family optional 18 Model 326 User s Reference DNS The IP address of the DNS server that will be used by appliances that are members of this Family optional To use a DHCP server to assign network resources select the Use DHCP check box This allows a DHCP server on your network to assign an IP address and subnet mask and to specify the default gateway address and address of the DNS server that will be used by appliances that are members of this Family 5 Select a Host Name Assignment Type The Host Name Assignment Type enables you to automatically specify a Host Name that members of this Family will use You can select one of the following Host Name Assignment Types No Allocation Assigns no preconfigured host name format to appliances that are members
293. s for subsequent execution or processing A I management information base MIB SNMP units of managed information that specifically describe an aspect of a system such as the system name hardware number or communications configuration A collection of related MIB objects is defined as a MIB megahertz MHz A unit of measure of frequency One megahertz 1 000 000 hertz MES See miscellaneous equipment specification MIB Management information base MIB browser In the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP a small PC or workstation application that can load MIB definitions query or set data items in a managed node and decode returned values and results in an easily readable form microinstruction An instruction for operations at a level lower than machine instructions T microprogram A sequence of microinstructions Microprograms are mainly used to implement machine instructions T migrate To move to a changed operating environment usually to a new release or version of a program system or device miscellaneous equipment specification MES Any equipment that is added after the time of the initial order mode field diameter A measure of the width of the guided optical power s intensity distribution in the core and the cladding of a single mode fiber Glossary of terms and abbreviations 213 modulation 1 The process by which a characteristic of a carrier is varied in accordance with a characteristic of an
294. s from system 3 System can continue to operate without redundancy protection if 1 and 2 above are not followed System under recommended voltage for 1 Check connections to power subsystem X v level warning indicated voltage supply 2 Replace power supply ons Replace power backplane Check connections to power subsystem Replace power supply Replace power backplane System under recommended X current level non critical system drawing less current than recommended on voltage X X V bus fault level critical overcurrent condition on X voltage bus N 12 V X bus fault level critical overcurrent condition on 12 volt X voltage bus DW 5 V fault level critical overcurrent condition on 5 V subsystem 240 VA fault level critical overcurrent or overvoltage condition in power subsystem N Recovering BIOS If your BIOS has become corrupted such as from a power failure during a flash update you can recover your BIOS using the recovery boot block and a BIOS flash diskette Note You can obtain a BIOS flash diskette image in one of the following ways Download a BIOS flash diskette from the Web site at hww ibm com storage suppori nas e Contact your IBM service representative The flash memory contains a protected area that cannot be overwritten The recovery boot block is a section of code in this protected area that enables the
295. s simultaneously write to the same shared disk that is not yet protected by the clustering software Configuring the interconnect private network adapter To configure the interconnect private network adapter perform the following steps on both nodes The Private connection is the heartbeat interconnect for the cluster 1 Right click My Network Places and then select Properties 2 Select the network connection that uses the IBM Netfinity 10 100 Ethernet Adapter 3 Right click the adapter icon and click Properties 4 Click Configure select the Advanced tab and verify that the following characteristics are set Link speed and Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex 5 Click OK 6 If prompted to restart the node select No Copyright IBM Corp 2002 37 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 In the Properties panel for the IBM 10 100 Adapter connection select Internet Protocol TCP IP from the components section and click Properties The default IP addresses should be e 10 1 1 1 for the first node e 10 1 1 2 for the joining node If they are not it is recommended that you set them to those values Ensure a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 Click Advanced and select the WINS tab Select the Disable NetBIOS over TCP IP radio button Click OK Select Yes at the prompt to continue using an empty Primary WINS address Click OK on the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties panel Click OK on the Local Area Connection Pro
296. s the same for each UNIX user to be mapped and the Windows group name and UNIX group name is the same for each UNIX group to be mapped Otherwise you should configure advanced maps 44 Model 326 User s Reference 18 19 20 21 22 To configure simple maps select Simple maps and continue with Step Rd To configure advanced maps clear the Simple maps check box and continue with Step Pil Under the Simple maps check box select the Windows domain name the domain to which you joined the Model 326 earlier in this chapter from the drop down list then continue with Step 22 Under Advanced maps do the following a Define user mappings as follows 1 Click Show user maps 2 Select the Windows domain name the domain to which you joined the Model 326 earlier in this chapter from the drop down list 3 Click Show Windows Users to display all of the Windows user names in the Windows domain you selected 4 Click Show UNIX Users to display all of the UNIX user names in the NIS domain you selected 5 Enter a Windows user name or select one from the list of Windows user names 6 Enter a UNIX user name to be mapped to the Windows user name you specified or select one from the list of UNIX user names 7 Click Add to add the mapping between the UNIX user name and Windows user name to the list of maps 8 If multiple Windows user names are mapped to one UNIX user name select one Windows user name to be the primary user n
297. s used The default is Disabled Note The Class 2 Service setting must be enabled to use the ACKO setting Fibre Channel Tape Support This setting is reserved for Fibre Channel tape support The default is Disabled Fibre Channel Confirm This setting is reserved for Fibre Channel tape support The default is Disabled Command Reference Number This setting is reserved for Fibre Channel tape support The default is Disabled Read Transfer Ready This setting is reserved The default is Disabled Response Timer Contains the value in 100 microsecond increments used by a timer to limit the time waiting accumulating multiple responses For example if this field is 8 the time limit is 800 microseconds The default is 0 Interrupt Delay Timer Contains the value in 100 microsecond increments used by a timer to set the wait time between accessing DMA a set of handles and generating an interrupt The default is 0 Scan Fibre Channel Devices Use this option to scan the FC loop and list all the connected devices by loop ID Information about each device is listed for example vendor name product name and revision This information is useful when configuring your FAST Host Adapter and attached devices Fibre Disk Utility This option scans the FC loop bus and lists all the connected devices by loop ID You can select a disk device and perform a low level format or verify the disk media CAUTION Performing a low level form
298. s volume extend This command extends the current in focus volume into contiguous unallocated space The unallocated space must begin where the in focus partition ends The format of the command and its options are extend size n Chapter 4 Setting up storage 33 where size is the size of the extension in MB Note that if the partition had been formatted with the NTFS file system the file system is automatically extended to occupy the larger partition and data loss does not occur However if the partition had been formatted with a file system format other than NTFS the command is unsuccessful and does not change the partition DiskPart blocks the extension of only the current system or boot partition Several other commands that are useful when you expand the LUN are assign Use this command to assign a letter or mount point to the current selected in focus partition If you do not specify a drive letter the next available drive letter is assigned If the letter or mount point is already in use an error is generated You can use this command to change the drive letter that is associated with a removable drive The drive letter assignment is blocked on the system boot or paging volumes You cannot use this command to assign a drive letter to an OEM partition or any globally unique identifier GUID partition table GPT partition other than the Msdata partition The format of the command and its options are assi
299. se is to couple power between a fiber and a source or detector A P packet internet groper PING In Internet communications a program used in TCP IP networks to test the ability to reach destinations by sending the destinations an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request and waiting for a reply parity check 1 A redundancy check by which a recalculated parity bit is compared to the pre given parity bit T 2 A check that tests whether the number of ones or zeros in an array of binary digits is odd or even A passive hub A hub that adds nothing to the data being transmitted through it path The connection between a storage port and the WWN World Wide Name target LUN of a storage device path group A collection of equivalent paths Storage devices may have one two or n path groups PCI See Peripheral Component Interconnect PCNFSD See personal computer NFS daemon PCMCIA See Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PDU Power distribution unit Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI A local bus for PCs from Intel that provides a high speed data path between the CPU and up to 10 peripherals video disk network and so on The PCI bus coexists in the PC with the ISA or EISA bus ISA and EISA boards still plug into an ISA or EISA slot while high speed PCI controllers plug into a PCI slot Persistent Storage Manager PSM Columbia Data Products software that creates multiple point in t
300. self the administration IP address fable 1 on page 7 shows a summary of the networking information necessary for the public connection Two static IP addresses for the cluster interconnect on a private network or crossover through the onboard Ethernet adapter The default IP addresses for the private network adapters are 10 1 1 1 for the first node in the cluster and 10 1 1 2 for the node that joins the cluster The top node in the Model 326 is considered the first node and the bottom node is considered the joining node Notes 1 If you are not the system administrator contact that person for the applicable IP addresses Each node in a cluster must join the same domain and be able to access a Primary Domain Controller PDC and DNS server but it is not required that the nodes log into the domain Each node in the cluster must have at least two network adapters at least one for the public network and the other for the private interconnect Shared disk requirements All shared disk arrays and devices including the quorum disk must be physically attached to a shared storage bus All shared disks must be configured as basic not dynamic disks All shared disks must have the same drive letter on each node All partitions on these disks must be formatted with NTFS All partitions on these disks must also be Primary Partitions Compression must not be enabled Powering off and powering on the Model 326 The clu
301. ser Windows 2000 for NAS a Web based GUI for those not familiar with the Windows desktop IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility IAACU for setup and configuring multiple devices or other appliances on a single network Chapter 1 Introduction 3 After you determine how you will manage the Model 326 you can begin setup and configuration of the device For more information on configuration and administration tools see Step 1 Initial network setup Configure both nodes to enable access over the network The general steps to do this are EL below More details are given in chapter Gattind 1 Use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or static addressing to set up one public network connection in each node a If you are operating with a keyboard display and mouse set up a public network connection to access the device b If you are operating in a headless environment use one of the following methods e If DHCP is installed and the IP address requested can be determined you can use DHCP for initial setup but you should change this address to static later in the configuration e If you have multiple appliances or cannot determine the DHCP address you can install the IAACU utility to identify appliances and define IP addresses The tool will also allow you to set static addresses 2 ee the steps in Step 2 Define shared storage and setup partitions The Model 326 comes with preconfigured shared
302. ses uptime to provide continuous access to data Note Throughout this book information about the Model 326 node and engine applies to both its nodes and engines The preloaded software is based on the Windows Powered OS operating system which is very similar to Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server Preloaded software includes Microsoft Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage Enables remote administration of the appliance using a Web based graphical user interface GUI Microsoft Cluster Service Provides clustering support and failover Microsoft Windows Terminal Services Enables remote administration of the appliance using its Windows desktop Microsoft Services for UNIX Provides file access to UNIX and UNIX based clients and servers through the Network File System NFS protocol Note that the Model 326 supports Linux and other platforms that employ NFS IBM Director Agent and Universal Manageability Server Extensions Provides system management support based on industry standards in conjunction with the IBM Director console application as well as other management software IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility agent Supports management through the IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility console application supports aggregate Web based management of all of your IBM appliances IBM FAStT Storage Manager for Windows 2000 Provides RAID configuration management for the external RAID controllers and storage
303. sk drive attached to the FAStT Host Adapter The default is Disabled Frame Size This setting specifies the maximum frame length supported by the FAStT Host Adapter The default size is 1024 If using F Port point to point connections change this setting to 2048 for maximum performance Loop Reset Delay After resetting the loop the firmware does not initiate any loop activity for the number of seconds specified in this setting The default is 5 seconds Adapter Hard Loop ID This setting forces the adapter to attempt to use the ID specified in the Hard Loop ID setting The default is Disabled Copyright IBM Corp 2002 171 Hard Loop ID If the Adapter Hard Loop ID setting is enabled the adapter attempts to use the ID specified in this setting The default ID is 0 Selectable boot settings Though you can access this option from the Configuration Settings menu do not change the settings as booting from Fibre Channel is not supported Restore default settings You can access this option from the Configuration Settings menu It restores the FAStT Host Adapter default settings Raw NVRAM data This option displays the adapter s NVRAM contents in hexadecimal format This is a QLogic troubleshooting tool you cannot modify the data Advanced adapter settings You can access this option from the Configurati settings for the FASET Host Adapter are listed in following paragraphs Table 34 Advanced adapter settings on Set
304. skette so that it will use a static IP address and subnet mask when accessing the network On the PSM recovery diskette edit the file a net_sets bat Set the IPAddress and SubnetMask environment variables as follows 1 Uncomment the two lines that begin with rem comment lines by removing the rem from the beginning of both lines 2 For each line what follows the equals sign is an IP address expressed as a set of four space separated numbers an IP address without the dots Change the SubnetMask value to match the subnet mask your network uses Chapter 6 Managing and protecting the network and storage 65 Change the IPAddress value to match the IP address you want to assign to the node during the recovery operation Do not insert dots between the numbers octets in either value As an example here is how the lines would look for a node using IP address 192 168 1 200 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 set SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 set IPAddress 192 168 1 200 If you later want to reconfigure the recovery diskette to use DHCP to obtain an IP address instead of static IP addressing you must reinsert rem in front of the SubnetMask and IPAddress lines to disable static IP addressing as follows based on the previous example REM set SubnetMask 255 255 255 0 REM set IPAddress 192 168 1 200 Specifying multiple 10 100 Ethernet adapters If the Model 326 has more than one 10 100 Ethernet adapter per node then you must conf
305. ssion in which the time intervals between characters do not have to be equal Start and stop bits are added to coordinate the transfer of characters ATM See asynchronous transfer mode attach To make a device a part of a network logically Not to be confused with connect which implies physically connecting a device to a network Contrast with connect attachment A port or a pair of ports optionally including an associated optical bypass that are managed as a functional unit A dual attachment includes two ports a port A and a port B A single attachment includes a Port S attachment feature 1 The circuitry by which some host processors or controllers are connected to a LAN access unit or connection point 2 A feature that can be added to enhance the capability storage capacity or performance of a product but is not essential for its basic work for example an adapter that allows a device to attach to a network 204 Model 326 User s Reference attachment unit interface AUI Also known as thick Ethernet thicknet or 10BASE5 This type of Ethernet connector has a 15 pin D type connector attention ATTN An occurrence external to an operation that could cause an interruption of the operation AUI See attachment unit interface authentication In computer security verification of the identity of a user or the user s eligibility to access an object auto removal The removal of a device from data passing activity without human
306. st have the same front end and backend connectivity failure 1 The termination of the ability of a functional unit to perform its required function 2 An uncorrected hardware error Failures are either recoverable or not recoverable by the software or the operator The operator is always notified when failures occur Contrast with error Fast Ethernet An Ethernet standard that provides a data rate of 100 Mbps feature code A code used by IBM to process hardware and software orders Federal Communications Commission FCC A board of commissioners appointed by the President under the Communications Act of 1934 having the power to regulate all interstate and foreign communications by wire and radio originating in the United States fiber optic cable See optical cable Glossary of terms and abbreviations 209 Fiber Optic Inter Repeater Link FOIRL An IEEE standard for fiber optic Ethernet FIC See File Image Capture field replaceable unit FRU An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails In some cases a field replaceable unit may contain other field replaceable units Contrast with customer replaceable unit CRU File Image Capture FIC Function that takes a file system clone and a read only copy of the certain read write active file system File Image Capture reflects the state of the file system at the time it was created File Image Restore Function that allows a file system to reve
307. start User Name Mapping You can do this through the GUI or by the commands net stop mapsvc net start mapsvc 2 Define maps Simple maps provide automated mapping between UNIX and Windows users and groups with the same names This is recommended You can enable simple maps by following this path User Name Mapping gt Maps and clicking Simple Maps To create advanced maps for users and groups on the Maps panel click Show User Maps or Show Group Maps and then fill in the appropriate fields 74 Model 326 User s Reference Enabling Server for NFS To enable Server for NFS you need to specify where User Name Mapping is running To specify where User Name Mapping is running follow this path Services for UNIX gt User Name Mapping and then enter the server name that is running User Name Mapping in the Computer Name field For a cluster this entry must be the clustered name or IP address not that of an individual node When planning an NFS installation consider which machines you want to have particular access levels to NFS shares Each class of access should be captured by defining a separate client group e To define a client group click Services for UNIX gt Client Groups enter the group name in the Group Name field then click New To add members to a client group select a group name from the current groups list then click Advanced and enter the name of a client a valid computer name A note on anonymous ac
308. stem NFS is provided in the Model 326 by a preloaded and preconfigured software component Microsoft Services for UNIX The levels of NFS supported by Services for UNIX and in turn the Model 326 are NFS Versions 2 and 3 Any client workstation that supports NFS Version 2 or NFS Version 3 regardless of the operating system should be able to connect to the Model 326 and access its storage as defined by the Model 326 administrator To administer NFS file shares and other attributes use standard Windows administration tools including those provided as part of the IBM NAS desktop and the Microsoft Windows 2000 for NAS user interface To support NFS security you must perform additional configuration of the User Name Mapping component of Services for UNIX which maps the UNIX user name space to the Windows user name space 72 Model 326 User s Reference Consult the online documentation for Services for UNIX for more information on configuring User Name Mapping To view the online documentation for Services for UNIX on the Model 326 either node can be used 1 From the Model 326 desktop click the IBM NAS Admin icon On the left pane of the IBM NAS Admin console expand File Systems Expand Services for UNIX Select any of the items that appear under Services for UNIX Click anywhere on the right pane of the IBM NAS Admin console then press the F1 key to bring up the online documentation for Services for UNIX in a separate window RON
309. stering function requires special considerations when you need to 6 Model 326 Users Reference ower off and power on the Model 326 See opaca tor detalla Table 1 Networking information worksheet for the public connection Cluster component Information needed Cluster Cluster name IP address Subnet mask First node Computer name example IBM5195 23H1234 IP address Subnet mask Gateway Preferred DNS WINS server optional Joining node Domain to join Computer name IP address Subnet mask Gateway Preferred DNS WINS server optional Domain name Chapter 1 Introduction 8 Model 326 User s Reference Chapter 2 Configuration and administration tools Attention Changing the preloaded software configuration of this product including applying or installing unauthorized service packs or updates to preinstalled software or installing additional software products that are not included in either the preloaded image or on the Supplementary CD might not be supported and could cause unpredictable results For updated compatibility information refer to the IBM web site To correct problems with a preloaded software component back up your user and system data Then use the Recovery CD to restore the preloaded software image The Model 326 appliance comes with the following configuration programs that you can use to configure an
310. sumes that the Transmission Control Protocol TCP is the underlying protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP In the Internet suite of protocols a network management protocol that is used to monitor routers and attached networks SNMP is an application layer protocol Information on devices managed is defined and stored in the application s Management Information Base MIB single system image SSI A system architecture in which a cluster of engines provides an external view of the system such that it appears as a single entity in terms of administration client side attachment or both single mode optical fiber An optical fiber in which only the lowest order bound mode which can consist of a pair of orthogonally polarized fields can propagate at the wavelength of interest Contrast with multimode optical fiber single route broadcast The forwarding of specially designated broadcast frames only by bridges which have single route broadcast enabled If the network is configured correctly a single route broadcast frame will have exactly one copy delivered to every LAN segment in the network Synonym for limited broadcast small computer system interface SCSI A standard hardware interface that enables a variety of peripheral devices to communicate with one another SMTP See Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol splitter In a local area network LAN a passive device used at a node to conn
311. t Determines the type of loop initialization process LIP reset that is used when the operating system initiates a bus reset routine When this setting is yes the driver initiates a global LIP reset to clear the target device reservations When this setting is no the driver initiates a global LIP reset with full login The default is No Enable LIP Full Login Instructs the ISP chip to log in to all ports after any LIP The default is Yes Enable Target Reset Enables the drivers to issue a Target Reset command to all devices on the loop when a SCSI Bus Reset command is issued The default is Yes Login Retry Count Specifies the number of times the software tries to log in to a device The default is 30 retries Port Down Retry Count Specifies the number of times the software retries a command to a port returning port down status The default is 30 retries Drivers Load RISC Code When this setting is enabled the host adapter uses the RISC firmware that is embedded in the software driver When this setting is disabled the software driver loads the RISC firmware found on the system The default is Enabled Note The driver being loaded must support this setting If the driver does not support this setting the result is the same as disabled regardless of the setting Leaving this option enabled guaranties a certified combination of software driver and RISC firmware Enable Database Updates When enabled it allows the software to save
312. ta stations on the same local area network LAN Segment Number The identifier that uniquely distinguishes a LAN segment in a multi segment LAN LAN to LAN An access mode for connecting remote LAN sites large scale integration LSI The process of integrating large numbers of circuits on a single chip of semiconductor material LBG See load balancing group LDAP See Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Lightweight Directory Access Protocol In TCP IP a protocol that enables users to locate people organizations and other resources in an Internet directory or intranet directory limited broadcast Synonym for single route broadcast link aggregation A type of bond group that combines the bandwidth of two or more ports to serve as one IP address The bond group distributes data across the bonded ports by using an algorithm See bond group LIP Loop initialization process load balancing group LBG A type of virtual network interface that comprises a set of physical and bonded interfaces A set of nodes within a virtual server that has layer 2 front end connectivity can be collectively identified by a unique IP address and grouped into a load balancing group LBG The intent of such a grouping is to enable all 212 Model 326 Users Reference nodes in the LGB to share the file serving load A unique IP address and DNS host name combination identify each load balancing group Depending on the front end connectivity you can configu
313. te For more information on network setup and cluster MaE see Step 4 Cluster administration At this point you can add users file shares and complete other configuration tasks to improve operations of the Model 326 in a cluster environment 1 Add users see 2 Add file shares see Note that you een configure Saver or NFS before NFS file sharing can be used For more information on cluster administration see Configuring clusters on Step 5 Additional functions Additional functions are available for backup persistent images and adding more storage areas It is recommended that after you complete the setup and configuration procedures y ou use the Persistent t Storage Manager system integrity For more information see hnd storage on page 54 Chapter 1 Introduction 5 Cluster setup requirements Before you configure the Model 326 nodes for clustering ensure that the following requirements are met Network requirements A unique NetBIOS cluster name You will need at least seven static IP addresses five for the node and cluster setup and two for each file share served by the cluster A formula for the number of static IP addresses is 5 2 x number_of_file shares The IP addresses required for node and cluster setup are Atleast three unique static IP addresses for the public network one for each node for client access through the PCI NIC adapter and one for the cluster it
314. ted even after restarts or power on and off cycles until it is disabled as follows sw admin gt setGbicMode 0 An example mode of operation would be to disable the hub set the GBIC mode to 1 and execute the crossPortTest command with singlePortAlso activated The crossPortTest would then limit testing to e All ports with GBIC and embedded optics present All ports with GBIC and embedded optics present and properly cable loopbacked Allow ports to be connected to itself single port connections Note If a GBIC is failing severely such that the crossPortTest cannot determine if a GBIC is even installed that port is not tested and is not reported as failing Therefore it is important to make sure that testing occurs on all the ports that are intended This can be done by observing the screen messages from the crossPortTest Clears diagnostic errors detected on a specified port If you do not include the port parameter all errors are cleared diagDisablePost Disables POST processing The start up time without POST processing is approximately 50 55 seconds for warm or cold starts A hub restarted without POST generates the DIAG POST_SKIPPED error Note IBM recommends that POST processing always be executed to ensure the operational status of the hub during the start up stage diagEnablePost diagShow 162 Model 326 Users Reference Enables POST processing The choice remains in effect across power on and off
315. ted to LWL ports Note All ports on the hub must be connected if GBIC mode is disabled or else the hub shows an error condition When running the cross port test you must set the operating mode value to 0 or 1 Modes 2 and 3 do not send out the extended link parameters ELP used to discover switches and hubs If the ELP is not sent the hub does not know the port is connected to another port on the same hub and the test fails This command behaves differently according to the modes activated as follows switchEnable or switchDisable mode e Online mode In the online mode where the hub is enabled prior to executing the test the test only tests ports that are cable loopbacked to ports in the same hub Ports connected outside of the hub under test are ignored To run the test must find at least one port if singlePortAlso mode is active two ports if singlePortAlso mode is not active default cable loopbacked to each other If this criteria is not met the test displays the following message in the Telnet shell Need at least 1 port s connected to run this test or Need at least 2 port s cross connected to run this test Offline mode In the offline mode where the hub is disabled prior to executing the test it tests and expects that all ports are cable loopbacked to similar ports in the same hub If one or more ports are found not connected it aborts the test The test determines which port is connected t
316. th the steps in this chapter configure the abated storage using the Storage Manager application See Treet i or deta The Model 326 uses Microsoft Cluster Server MSCS software to provide clustering technology for your storage Clustering ensures availability of the storage regardless of individual component failure After installing the clustering function you can use Cluster Administration to set up the failover function Then if a node or a node s component were to fail the Model 326 detects the failure and begins a failover process in less than 10 seconds and completes the process within 60 seconds Failover Failback includes Active Active support for the CIFS and NFS protocols Active Active support is available for HTTP and FTP See the online cluster administration guide for this procedure Novell NetWare and Apple Macintosh shares are available on both nodes but not through clustering services If either node fails the shares become unavailable until the node is brought back up This chapter gives the details for installing and initially configuring MSCS on the Model 326 Administrative concepts and procedures are provided in the online help and at the following Web sites Networking setup Attention Before you install cluster services on the first node make sure that the joining node is powered off This is required to prevent corruption of data on the shared storage devices Corruption can occur if both node
317. the Volume Settings page and making sure that the total of all values in the Cache Size column is 1 TB or less You can access Persistent Storage Manager through the Persistent Storage Manager link on the IBM NAS Admin console on the Model 326 desktop or by starting the Windows 2000 for Network Attached Storage user interface and then selecting Disks then Persistent Storage Manager If the total is greater than 1 TB you should reduce the size of the cache on one or more of the volumes by selecting the volume from the list then clicking Configure then selecting a smaller value from the Cache size drop down list and clicking OK Note You cannot change the size of the cache on a volume that has persistent images You must delete all persistent images on the volume before changing the cache size You should try to reduce the cache size on a volume that has no persistent images if possible before deleting any persistent images If more than 1 TB of cache is configured on the Model 326 the following can occur note that a volume for which a persistent image has never been created is considered to have a cache size of zero regardless of how large its cache is configured to be When the Model 326 is restarted PSM prevents a volume from being mounted on the file system prevents it from being accessible if that volume s PSM cache would increase the total size of all cache files on all volumes mounted to that point above 1 TB
318. the device Time out failure during Ensure the SCSI bus is terminated correctly by following these steps 1 Disconnect the peripheral cables from the host adapter 2 Restart the engine 3 If the engine restarts successfully check the bus terminations and cable connections Also one of the devices on the bus might be defective Testing the Fibre Channel host adapter with FAStT MSJ Note Ensure that there is no adapter activity before running the test to avoid losing data The Model 326 engine comes with FAStT MSJ for viewing the status of the Fibre Channel connection as well as testing the adapter or cable To use FAStT MSJ first start Terminal Services For instructions on how to invoke Terminal Services see You access FAStT MSJ by starting the IBM NAS Admin console selecting NAS Management gt Storage gt NAS Utilities gt FAStT MSJ Then select Connect A diagnostic panel displays the following general information related to the Fibre Channel adapter which can be useful if you need to place a support call Node name e Serial number in hex Loop ID e BIOS version e Firmware version number e Device driver version number e PCI slot number FAStT MSJ also provides the Model 326 engine s world wide name WWN as detailed in 108 Model 326 User s Reference To test the Fibre Channel adapter select the adapter and then click the Diagnostic button FAStT MSJ can perform fiber loopback and data
319. the following without apparent cause 1 Reseat the adapter 2 Reinstall the drivers The network driver files might be damaged or deleted 3 Try a different Gigabit Ethernet SX Adapter 100 Model 326 User s Reference Table 13 Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter troubleshooting chart continued Gigabit adapter symptom Suggested Action LINK LED is not On Check the following 1 Ensure that you have loaded the adapter driver 2 Check all connections at the adapter and the buffered repeater or switch 3 Try another port on the buffered repeater or switch 4 Ensure that the buffered repeater or switch port is configured for 1000 Mbps and full duplex 5 Try changing the auto negotiation setting on the link partner if possible RX or TX LED is no On Check the following 1 Ensure that you have loaded the adapter driver 2 Network might be idle try logging in from a workstation 3 The adapter is not transmitting or receiving data try another adapter Troubleshooting the Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter Table 14 displays the LED definitions for the Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter LED definitions Table 14 Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter LED definitions LED Indication Meaning LNK Off Either the adapter or the switch or both are not receiving power or the cable connection between them is faulty Green The adapter and switch ar
320. the loop configuration information in flash memory when the system powers down The default is No Note This option usually applies to Windows NT and Windows 2000 operating environments Disable Database Load When enabled the device database is read from the Registry during driver initialization When disabled the device database is created dynamically during driver initialization The default is No IOCB Allocation Specifies the maximum number of buffers from the firmware s buffer pool that are allocated to any one port The default is 256 buffers Appendix F Fast UTIL options 173 Extended Error Logging Provides additional error and debug information to the operating system When enabled events are logged into the Windows NT or Windows 2000 Event Viewer The default is Disabled Extended Firmware Settings You can access this option from the Configuration Setings menu The default settings for the FASET Host Adapter are listed in immediately following the table Table 35 Extended firmware settings and described Setting Options Default Extended Control Block Enabled or Disabled Enabled RIO Operation Mode 0 1 2 3 4 0 Connection Options 0 1 2 3 3 Class 2 Service Enabled or Disabled Disabled ACKO Enabled or Disabled Disabled Fibre Channel Tape Support Enabled or Disabled Disabled Fibre Channel Confirm Enabled or Disabled Disabled Command Reference Enabled or Disabled Disabled Numb
321. the main menu appears containing the following selections Hardware Status and Information e Configuration Settings e Update System Management firmware Use the up and down arrow keys to select Hardware Status and Information and press Enter The Hardware Status and Information menu contains the list of ISMP devices with the following diagnostic test results Processor Communication Passed gt Built in Self Test Status Passed Boot Sector Code Revision 6 Build ID RIET62A Main Application Code Revision 4 Build ID ILET15A Processor Communication Passed gt Built in Self Test Status Passed Boot Sector Code Revision 6 Build ID WMICT60A Main Application Code Revision 4 Build ID WMXT57A Note The version numbers in the example diagnostic test results shown in this document might differ from your results Use the up and down arrow keys to select the device to view in more detail Press Enter You will see a list of tests and results on the device Current System Management Processor Status Current BIST Results SRAM Memory Test Passed Serial Port 1 Test Passed Serial Port 2 Test Passed Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 109 NVRAM Memory Test Passed Realtime Clock Test Passed Programmable Gate Array Test Passed I2C Interface Test Passed Main Application Checksum Passed Boot Sector Checksum Passed Current System Management Adapter Status Current BIST Results SRAM Memory Test
322. the spinSilk list of ports to test For example if GBIC mode is activated ports 0 6 which have imbedded optics are always included in the testing Port 7 is only included if a GBIC is plugged into it Appendix E Setup procedures and diagnostics for the Fibre Channel Hub 163 The state of the GBIC mode is saved in flash and stays activated even after restarts or power on and off cycles until it is disabled as follows sw admin gt setGbicMode 0 An example mode of operation is to disable the hub set the GBIC mode to 1 and execute the spinSilk command which would limit its testing to e All ports with GBIC and embedded optics present e All ports with GBIC and embedded optics present properly cable loopbacked Note When running the spinSilk test you must set the operating mode value to O or 1 Modes 2 and 3 do not send out the ELP used to discover switches and hubs If the ELP is not sent the hub does not know the port is connected to another port on the same hub and the test fails Using operating mode O when running spinSilk is preferred If you do not include the nMillions parameter the number of frames for the test to execute in millions of frames the spinSilk test runs until you press Enter sramRetentionTest supportShow 164 Model 326 User s Reference Verifies that e Data written into the ASIC memories are retained e Data bits do not drop when read after some amount of delay since the write Prints t
323. thernet cable by plugging one end of the Ethernet cable into the black box on the first ISMP interconnect cable and the other end into the black box on the second ISMP interconnect cable Using the ISMP and RSA The documentation CD that came with your system contains additional information and software for the ISMP and the RSA To use the ISMP complete the following steps 1 Consult the ISMP user s manual and the README file that is located on the documentation CD for additional information 2 Run the executable to create a bootable floppy disk The executable is located in C IBM ASMP UPDATES 32P0303 EXE 3 Boot each node of the Model 326 with the bootable floppy disk to configure the ISMP To use the RSA complete the following steps 1 Consult the RSA user s manual and the README file that is located on the documentation CD 2 Run the executable to create a bootable floppy disk The executable is located in C IBM ASMP UPDATES 33P2474 EXE 3 Boot each node of the Model 326 with floppy disk created in the previous step to configure the RSA 80 Model 326 User s Reference Enabling Ethernet adapter teaming Intel adapters This section describes how to enable adapter teaming on the Ethernet adapters The Intel Ethernet adapters Gigabit Ethernet SX and 10 100 Ethernet that you install in the PCI slots of the Model 326 nodes support adapter teaming The 10 100 adapter can also team with
324. tics The diagnostic tests determine the status of the hub and isolate problems You run the oe tests with Telnet commands For more information about running K a The AF tests are available e Hub offline switchDisable e Memory test ramTest e Port register test portRegTest e Central memory test centralMemoryTest e CMI Conn test cmiTest e CAM test camTest e Port loopback test portLoopbackTest e Cross port test crossPortTest 112 Model 326 User s Reference e SpinSilk test spinSilk e SRAM data retention test sramRetentionTest e CMem data retention test cmemRetentionTest Hub online switchEnable Attention Offline tests are disruptive to hub operations Do not run these tests unless you are sure that hub operation can be disrupted Table 2d shows the offline and online tests Table 20 Hub offline and online tests Offline tests Offline and online tests camTest crossPortTest centralMemoryTest ramTest cmiTest cmemRetention Test portLoopbackTest portRegTest spinSilk sramRetentionTest IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller This section contains information to help you solve some of the simpler problems that you might have with the IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller It contains the problem symptoms and error messages along with suggested actions to take to resolve the problem Always use the sto
325. tings menu The default Hable ad and described in the Setting Options Default Execution Throttle 1 256 256 Fast Command Posting Enabled or Disabled Enabled gt 4 GByte Addressing Enabled or Disabled Disabled LUNs per Target 0 8 16 32 64 128 256 0 Enable LIP Reset Yes or No No Enable LIP Full Login Yes or No Yes Enable Target Reset Yes or No Yes Login Retry Count 0 255 30 Port Down Retry Count 0 255 30 Drivers Load RISC Code Enabled or Disabled Enabled Enable Database Updates Yes or No No Disable Database Load Yes or No No IOCB Allocation 1 512 buffers 256 buffers Extended Error Logging Enabled or Disabled Disabled Execution Throttle Specifies the maximum number of commands executing on any one port When a port s execution throttle is reached no new commands are executed until the current command finishes executing The valid options for this setting are 1 256 The default optimum is 256 Fast Command Posting Decreases command execution time by minimizing the number of interrupts The default is Enabled 172 Model 326 User s Reference gt 4 GByte Addressing Enable this option if the system has more than 4 GB of memory available The default is Disabled LUNs per Target Specifies the number of LUNs per target Multiple LUN support is typically for redundant array of independent disks RAID boxes that use LUNs to map drives The default is 0 Enable LIP Rese
326. tinue on the first screen click Continue again click Exit Setup and finally click Yes save and exit Setup 8 When the diskette loads you are prompted with a message which asks if you want to proceed Enter Y to proceed If you enter N you will be returned to a command prompt 9 The recovery process begins automatically Follow the instructions provided by the image restoration software and the original manufacturing preload will be restored During the restoration of the preload you are prompted to insert the other recovery CDs into the CD ROM drive When the preload image is restored the Model 326 restarts automatically You may now remove the last inserted CD Recovery CD 4 from the CD ROM drive 10 If you have installed more processor memory the BIOS configuration program appears a second time Click Continue on the first screen then click Continue again then click Exit Setup and finally click Yes save and exit Setup You can now detach the keyboard and display from the failed node and allow the recovery process to complete automatically m Important e Do not connect to or configure the node for at least 15 minutes after system restart After the node restarts a series of configuration and system preparation programs that finish configuring the node run automatically These programs must finish running before you use any included applications such as the IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility or the Terminal S
327. to remove a previously discovered appliance from a Family or group and to add an appliance to the first matching Family in the tree view Help Use the Help menu to display product information Discovering Model 326 Appliances Any Model 326 appliance or other IBM appliance that is running and is connected to the same subnet as the system running the IAACU Console is automatically discovered when you start the IAACU Console Discovered appliances appear in the IAACU Console tree view in the left pane of the IAACU Console window Each appliance appears in two locations in the tree view e Every discovered appliance is listed in the tree view under All Appliances e Each discovered appliance also appears in one of the following sections of the tree view Ina Family If the discovered appliance fits the requirements of a Family it will automatically appear as part of a Family Notes 1 If a discovered appliance fits the requirements of more than one Family it is automatically added to the first appropriate Family that is listed in the tree view starting from the top of the tree For information on how to move appliances between families see 2 If the Model 326 cannot be discovered by the IAACU console check the IP and subnet addresses of the Model 326 and the computer that is running the IAACU console Inthe Orphaned Appliances group If the discovered appliance does not fit a previously configured Family it is plac
328. tor password 27 Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility 11 Alacritech 10 100 Quad Port Ethernet adapter adapter teaming 82 testing 101 troubleshooting 101 Alacritech SLICuser 2 antivirus protection 75 appliance initial setup and configuration 26 battery replacing 93 beep codes 135 binding order 39 BIOS recovering 92 boot block jumper 93 C CDs Recovery and Supplementary 123 changing administrator password 27 changing storage subsystem host type 32 checking the FAStT host bus adapter s Fibre Channel connectivity 109 CIFS clustered file shares creating 47 Cluster Service 2 clustering 37 completing setup 37 configuration requirements 6 configuring cluster state and properties 41 installation steps cluster configuration 40 Copyright IBM Corp 2002 clustering continued installation steps continued joining a node to a domain 40 networking setup 37 shared storage setup 29 powering off and powering on the Model 326 when clustering is active 49 setting up cluster resource balancing 42 setup requirements 6 Columbia Data Products Persistent Storage Manager PSM 2 completing networking clustering and storage access setup 37 components of the Model 326 IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU hub 85 IBM 5187 Network Attached Storage Model 6RZ engine 85 IBM 5191 RAID Storage Controller Model ORU storage controller 85 IBM 5192 Storage Unit Model ORU storage unit 85 computer name recommendation against c
329. ts are made to communicate over any public networks that are installed Do not change the communication options for the public network adapters as they should support both network and cluster traffic Chapter 5 Completing networking clustering and storage access setup 41 4 Open the properties for the private network and select Internal cluster communication only private network to ensure that no client traffic will be placed on the private network 5 Click Apply OK and then OK Setting up cluster resource balancing When you configure cluster resources you should manually balance them on the disk groups to distribute the cluster resource functions between the two nodes This allows for a more efficient response time for the clients and users accessing these resources To set up cluster resource balancing 1 Select a disk group and bring up its Properties panel by right clicking it 2 Click the General tab 3 Click the Modify button to the right of the Preferred owners field 4 In the Available nodes pane select a node and click the gt button to move the node to the Preferred Owners pane 5 Complete Steps H through Ml for each disk group Each disk group has a preferred owner so that when both nodes are running all resources contained within each disk group have a node defined as the owner of those resources Even though a disk group has a preferred owner its resources can run on the other node in the cluster fo
330. ts as the imitated system 208 Model 326 Users Reference Emulation is usually achieved by means of hardware or firmware T 2 The use of programming techniques and special machine features to permit a computing system to execute programs written for another system engine The unit that contains the processors that respond to requests for data from clients This is where the operating software for the TotalStorage NAS 300 appliance resides equivalent paths A collection of paths to the storage device The paths have no switchover time penalty when changing from one path group to another while accessing the storage device error discrepancy between a computed observed or measured value or condition and the true specified or theoretically correct value or condition A 1 ESD See electrostatic discharge ESM See environmental service monitor Ethernet A standard protocol for a 10 Mbps baseband local area network LAN that allows multiple access and handles contention by using Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD as the access method Ethernet network A baseband LAN with a bus topology in which messages are broadcast on a coaxial cable using a carrier sense multiple access collision detection CSMA CD transmission method event message Synonym for call progress event message executable statement A statement that specifies one or more actions to be taken by a computer program at execution tim
331. tted diskette in the diskette drive of the node 2 On the Disaster Recovery page click Create Disk 3 Click OK on the Create Recovery Disk page The diskette drive LED will turn off when the creation is complete The diskette creation should take no more than two minutes 4 The utility makes the disk DOS bootable From a command prompt either through the desktop of the node itself with the diskette still in the diskette drive of the node or on another system with the diskette in its diskette drive type a fixboot exe and answer the prompts Note When you run fixboot exe on the diskette the diskette remains bootable unless you reformat it if you later erase files on the diskette you do not need to run fixboot exe again 5 Remove the diskette from the appropriate diskette drive Label the diskette appropriately and keep it in a safe place You can create additional copies of the diskette using the above procedure for each new copy Note If you change the backup location or logon settings using the Disaster Recovery Settings page you must rebuild the PSM recovery diskette s for that node to reflect the new settings for that node Static IP addressing If you do not have a DHCP server on your network and you must access a backup image that is only accessible through the network for example no backup image is located on the maintenance partition D drive of the node to be recovered then you must configure the recovery di
332. u Tokyo 106 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or program s described in this publication at any time without notice IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products O Copyright IBM
333. uite of protocols a protocol that provides remote terminal connection service It allows users of one host to log on to a remote host and interact as directly attached terminal users of that host timeout A time interval that is allotted for certain operations to occur for example a response to polling or addressing before system operation is interrupted and must be restarted Tivoli Storage Manager TSM A client server product that provides storage management and data access services in a heterogeneous environment Transmission Control Protocol TCP In TCP IP a host to host protocol that provides transmission in an internet environment TCP assumes Internet Protocol IP is the underlying protocol Glossary of terms and abbreviations 217 Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol and the Internet Protocol which together provide reliable end to end connections between applications over interconnected networks of different types True Image data view A data view that allows the file to be restored in the event of accidental deletion It consists of point in time images that provide a near instant virtual copy of an entire storage volume TSM See Tivoli Storage Manager twinaxial cable A three conductor cable with the two inner conductors serving to carry the signal energy and the outer conductor serving as ground The three conductors are insulated from each other U univ
334. ultiple access with collision avoidance CSMA CA the action of sending a jam signal and waiting for a variable time before transmitting data to avoid two or more simultaneous transmissions Common Internet File System CIFS A protocol that enables collaboration on the Internet by defining a remote file access protocol that is compatible with the way applications already share data on local disks and network file servers MS configuration list In a LAN a list of all of the names and addresses of stations attached to a LAN segment connect In a LAN to physically join a cable from a station to an access unit or network connection point Contrast with attach 206 Model 326 Users Reference connection oriented The communication process that proceeds through three well defined phases connection establishment data transfer and connection release Examples are X 25 Internet TCP and ordinary telephone calls connection oriented network A network that requires a setup procedure to be executed to establish an information channel between two logical nodes before they can interchange information control port An alternate port that you can use to access the configuration when the data ports are not available control unit A processor electronics assembly in a storage controller that exposes LUNs to the storage network and connects internally to the storage controllers disk drives A storage controller can have 1 to n but typically has
335. un during POST Table 29 Hub POST diagnostic tests Test Checks Memory test CPU RAM memory Port register test ASIC registers and SRAMs Central memory test System board SRAMs CMI conn test CMI bus between ASICs CAM test CAM Port loopback test All of the hub hardware frames are transmitted looped back and received 158 Model 326 User s Reference POST runs differently depending on the startup method A power cycle disconnecting from power and reconnecting to power is considered a cold start All other starts from a powered on state such as restart or panic are considered warm starts From a cold start condition executing a POST runs the long version of ramTest From a warm start condition executing a POST runs a shorter version of ramTest The start time with POST varies depending on the startup method A hub that is restarted with POST disabled generates the DIAG POST_SKIPPED error log message Diagnostic commands All commands are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown These tests are available from the Telnet session or from the service terminal connected to the local serial port In the following list the test name is followed b the command used to run the test provides brief descriptions of the commands Hub offline Memory test Port register test Central memory test CMI conn test CAM test Port loopback test Cross port test Spin silk test SRAM
336. urrent System Management Processor Status Current BIST Results SRAM Memory Test Passed Serial Port 1 Test Passed Serial Port 2 Test Passed NVRAM Memory Test Passed Realtime Clock Test Passed Programmable Gate Array Test Passed I2C Interface Test Passed Main Application Checksum Passed Boot Sector Checksum Passed Current System Management Adapter Status Current BIST Results SRAM Memory Test Passed Serial Port 1 Test Passed Serial Port 2 Test Passed 110 Model 326 User s Reference NVRAM Memory Test Passed Realtime Clock Test Passed Programmable Gate Array Test Passed 12C Interface Test Passed Main Application Checksum Passed Boot Sector Checksum Passed Onboard Ethernet Hardware Test Passed PCI EEPROM Initialization Test Passed 5 When you finish viewing this information press Esc to return to the main option menu Remove the CD then restart the engine Testing SCSI adapters The SCSI adapters are used for tape backup operations You can test and configure them during engine boot time by entering Ctrl A when prompted This invokes the BIOS SCSI Select utility Follow the on screen directions when this utility appears IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU This section gives troubleshooting information for the IBM 3534 Fibre Channel Hub Model 1RU Each hub port includes an LED indicator If a problem has been detected with the port the LED indicators provide some indication of the type of problem
337. using Persistent Images in the NAS Backup Assistant the NT Backup file BKF was created for the persistent image virtual drive letter instead of the original drive letter For example if you selected drive C for backup a persistent image was created on the next available drive letter in the system and that drive was backed up instead of drive C If you do not remember the original drive letter you can view the backup log files in NAS Backup Assistant The top section of the log file gives you the original drive letter and the bottom section gives you the persistent image drive letter When you have the original drive letter perform the procedure below To restore backups use the following procedure 1 5 Click the Restore using NT Backup link in the Backup and Restore section of the IBM NAS Admin console to open the backup GUI Click Restore Wizard then click Next You are asked what you want to restore Select the appropriate media that you are restoring from If you are restoring from tape expand the backup media pool name and then double click the media this will normally be named media created on date time This action will read the set list from the tape If you are restoring a file select Tools gt Catalog a backup file then click Browse and find the backup file BKF created for this backup Note If you do not know the BKF file name refer to the backup log in NAS Backup Assistant Click OK You wi
338. uto negotiation manually configure the Ethernet adapter to match the hub 6 If you manually configured the duplex mode ensure that you also manually configure the speed 7 Run diagnostics on the LEDS If the problem remains go to Q TAT to run the diagnostic programs The Ethernet Transmit Receive Activity light is not On Check the following Note The Ethernet Transmit Receive Activity LED is On only when data is sent to or by this Ethernet adapter 1 Ensure that you have loaded the network device drivers 2 The network might be idle Try sending data from this workstation 3 Run diagnostics on the LEDs 4 The function of this LED can be changed by device driver load parameters If necessary remove any LED parameter settings when you load the device drivers Data errors Check the following 1 Ensure that you are using Category 5 cabling when operating the Model 326 engine at 100 Mbps 2 Make sure that the cables do not run close to noise inducing sources like fluorescent lights The Ethernet adapter stopped working when another adapter was added to the Model 326 engine Check the following 1 Ensure that the cable is connected to the Ethernet adapter 2 Ensure that the PCI system BIOS is current 3 Reseat the adapter 4 Ensure that the adapter you are testing is supported by the Model 326 engine C on page 99 to run the diagnostic programs The Ethernet adapter stopped
339. ve action identity is in needed process One or more green Power supply Power cord Make sure the cord is LEDs off CRUs unplugged or switches turned off plugged in and the switches are turned on All drive CRUs Midplane failure Have the midplane replaced service technician only Several CRUs Hardware failure Replace the affected CRUS If this does not correct the problem have the ESM boards replaced followed by the midplane service technician only Front panel Power supply problem Make sure the cords are plugged in and power supplies are turned on Hardware failure If any other LEDs are on replace the midplane service technician only 120 Model 326 User s Reference Table 22 Storage unit troubleshooting table continued Problem Indicator Component Possible Cause Possible Solutions Intermittent or sporadic power loss to the expansion unit Some or all CRUs Defective AC power source or partially plugged in power cord Power supply failure Midplane failure 1 Check the AC power source 2 Reseat all installed power cables and power supplies 3 If applicable check the power components power units UPS and so on 4 Replace defective power cords Check for a Fault LED on the power supply and replace the failed CRU Have the midplane replaced service technician only Unable to access drives Drives an
340. ve the battery a Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the battery b Use one finger to slightly slide the battery from its socket The spring mechanism behind the battery will push the battery out toward you as you slide it from the socket c Use your thumb and index finger to pull the battery from under the battery clip d Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base of the battery socket by pressing gently on the clip 94 Model 326 User s Reference Figure 4 Battery removal 4 Insert the new battery a Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the socket under the battery clip b As you slide it under the battery clip press the battery down into the socket Deal al A ES ES Figure 5 Battery replacement 5 Reinstall the appliance cover and connect the cables Note Wait approximately 20 seconds after you plug the power cord of the engine into an electrical outlet for the Power Control button to become active 6 Turn on the appliance 7 Start the Configuration Setup Utility program and set configuration parameters a Set the system date and time Set the power on password Load setup defaults Save settings and exit Restart vers Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 95 Adapter troubleshooting and diagnostics This section presents information on troubleshooting and diagnosing the following engine adapters 10 100 integrated Ethernet adapter see
341. vices UM Services is a Windows application that functions as both a stand alone management tool for the system it is installed on and a client to IBM Director As a Director Client it receives and sends information to the Director Server as controlled from the IBM Director Console As a stand alone tool it provides a Web browser based interface and a Microsoft Management Console MMC interface where you can view the system status perform certain management tasks and configure alerts The Universal Manageability Services UM Services GUI enhances the local or remote administration monitoring and maintenance of IBM systems UM Services is a lightweight client that resides on each managed computer system With UM Services you can use a Web browser and UM Services Web console support to inventory monitor and troubleshoot IBM systems on which UM Services is installed This point to point systems management approach in which you use a Web browser to connect directly to a remote client system enables you to effectively maintain IBM systems without requiring the installation of additional systems management software on your administrator console In addition to point to point systems management support UM Services also includes support for UM Services Upward Integration Modules These modules enable systems management professionals who use any supported systems management platform including Tivoli Enterprise CA Unicenter TNG Fra
342. vices Client when installed on a workstation that is attached to the same network as the Model 326 enables you to remotely administer the appliance using the Model 326 desktop If you are familiar with administrative tasks using a Windows desktop you can use Terminal Services See mina e es and hage 12 for more information IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility IAACU The IBM Advanced Appliance Configuration Utility IAACU aids in setting up and reconfiguring the network configuration on your appliances The IAACU agent works with the IAACU Console to automatically detect the presence of appliances on the network After the appliance is detected by the IAACU Console you can use the IAACU to Set up and manage the network configuration for the appliance including assigning the IP address default gateway network mask and DNS server to be used by the appliance See the note in ESeiting up thd etwa an page 2 regarding the Ethernet adapter that is integrated on the planar board Start Universal Manageability Services on the appliance enabling you to perform advanced systems management tasks information Universal Manageability Services Universal Manageability Services UM Services provides point to point remote management of client systems using a Web browser Use UM Services to e Learn detailed inventory information about your computers including operating system memory network cards and hardware
343. when the Director Support Program and service are stopped Agents running on IBM NAS appliances do not need to be explicitly backed up because the NAS recovery CD provides this feature Applying the Recovery CD will reinstall the IBM Director Agent Software distribution The Software Distribution task enables you to import and silently distribute predefined software distribution packages to an IBM Director Client system These packages are prepared by IBM for IBM NAS products and include software fixes and release updates only This includes upgrading the IBM Director client itself The basic delivery is a single file package that is signed with a unique IBM NAS key Only IBM can create the signed packages that can be used by the IBM Director Software Distribution tool 56 Model 326 User s Reference Software distribution using IBM Director can be deployed to a single IBM Director client all IBM Director clients or some combination in between The administrator has complete control over which IBM Director clients receive any given package By default software distribution packages automatically install themselves immediately following delivery to the IBM client Delivery of the package can be done manually or scheduled for a later more convenient time Real time diagnostics Real time diagnostics provides nondisruptive testing of the agent This is an add in provided automatically on all IBM NAS appliances but you must also install it o
344. word The Change Administrator Password page appears allowing you to change the password Note the warning on the page that any information that you enter can be viewed by others on the network To prevent others from seeing your information set up a secure administration Web site as described in the online help To change IP addresses click on Interfaces The Network Adapters on Server Appliance page appears Use this page primarily to change IP addresses from dynamic DHCP which is the system default to static Note During the initial setup you should configure the nonplanar Ethernet adapter only The Model 326 engine uses the Ethernet adapter that is integrated on the planar board as the interconnect private network for clustering If you want to use an Ethernet adapter other than the default Ethernet adapter in slot 2 as the network interface to be attached to the subnet then you can change the order of precedence later with the Windows Networking Properties option The order of precedence for the initial configuration is PCI slot 2 then PCI slot 3 Note that you might need to enable some of the Model 326 NIC connections because the NICs in slots 1 3 and 4 are not enabled During initial setup the IAACU first looks for a 10 100 adapter in slot 2 which is enabled by default If there is no adapter in slot 2 the IAACU looks for a Gigabit adapter card in slot 3 and it should be enabled If the Gigabit adapter card is not Chapt
345. working without apparent cause Check the following 1 Run diagnostics for the Ethernet adapter 2 Try a different connector on the hub 3 Reinstall the device drivers Refer to your operating system documentation and to the User s Reference information If the problem remains go to henges to run the diagnostic programs Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 97 Troubleshooting the 10 100 PCI Ethernet adapter Use to find solutions to 10 100 Mbps Ethernet adapter problems that have definite symptoms on page 99 for information on testing the adapter Table 12 10 100 PCI Ethernet adapter troubleshooting chart Ethernet adapter symptom Suggested Action The adapter cannot connect to the network Diagnostics pass but the connection fails or errors occur Check the following iy Check the following 1 Ensure that the network cable is installed correctly The cable must be securely attached at both RJ 45 connections adapter and hub The maximum allowable distance from adapter to the hub is 100 m 328 ft If the cable is attached and the distance is within acceptable limits but the problem persists try a different cable If you are directly connecting two computers without a hub or switch make sure you are using a crossover cable Check the LED lights on the adapter The adapter has two diagnostic LEDs one on each side of the cable connector These lights help you to determine whether
346. xists with the connector cable or hub e The Ethernet Link Status light is On when the Ethernet adapter receives a LINK pulse from the hub If the light is Off there might be a bad connector or cable or a problem with the hub The Ethernet Transmit Receive Activity light is On when the Ethernet adapter sends or receives data over the Ethernet Network If the Ethernet 96 Model 326 User s Reference Transmit Receive Activity light is Off make sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers are loaded 4 Make sure that you are using the correct device drivers supplied with the Model 326 engine 5 Check for operating system specific causes for the problem 6 Make sure that the device drivers on the client and the Model 326 engine are using the same protocol 7 Test the Ethernet adapter by running the diagnostic program Inte Use Ethernet adapter troubleshooting chart to find solutions to 10 100 Mbps integrated Ethernet adapter problems that have definite symptoms Table 11 Integrated Ethernet adapter troubleshooting chart Ethernet adapter symptom Suggested Action Ethernet Link Status light is not On Check the following 1 Ensure that the hub is powered on 2 Check all connections at the Ethernet adapter and the hub 3 Check the cable A crossover cable is required unless the hub has an X designation 4 Use another port on the hub 5 If the hub does not support a
347. ynamic groups are automatically populated and maintained based on queries to the database These dynamic NAS groups must be added after the IBM Director Management Server has been installed on a dedicated server IBM NAS appliances appear under the Groups column in the IBM Director Management Server The Group Contents column will then contain all the IBM NAS devices that have been discovered on the network NAS Web Ul task NAS Web Ul is an IBM Director Management Server enhancement made specifically for managed networks containing IBM NAS appliances Install NAS Web Ul on the IBM Director Management Server and all IBM Director Consoles to create a new task called IBM NAS Appliances with a subtask named Launch Ul Web You can apply this new Console task to a NAS machine causing a Web browser to be automatically launched with a URL pointing to the Web Ul on the target NAS machine The port specified in the URL is port 8099 which invokes Windows 2000 for NAS Electronic Service Agent eSA Electronic Service Agent optionally resides on the customer s system and works in tandem with IBM Director to monitor events and securely transmit data to IBM on a periodic customer definable timetable This monitor watches system inventory hardware error logs and performance information and if the server is under a service agreement or within warranty period automatically reports hardware problems to IBM IBM will either contact the customer or send out
348. ystem management tasks using the Script Editor Use the following procedure to start the Enterprise Management window Perform these steps on one node and then bring up the other node to validate the input 1 2 Select Start gt IBM NAS Admin Click NAS Management gt Storage gt NAS Utilities gt IBM FAStT Storage Manager Client The client software starts displaying the Enterprise Management window and the Confirm Initial Automatic Discovery window Note The Enterprise Management window can require up to five minutes to open No wait indicator such as an hourglass is displayed Select Yes to begin an initial automatic discovery of hosts and storage subsystems attached to the local subnetwork on which the management station is installed If you do not want to perform the initial automatic discovery select No You must add the device manually to the Storage Manager Application The software sends a broadcast message across the local subnetwork where the management station is installed It discovers host agent managed storage subsystems if the hosts that provide network management connections to the storage subsystems respond to the broadcast The software discovers direct managed storage subsystems if the controllers in those storage subsystems respond to the broadcast message Note The Enterprise Management window can require up to 1 minute to refresh after an initial automatic discovery To stop the automatic discovery op

Model 326 User`s Reference - ps-2.kev009.com, an archive of old

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents